The Xerox
4505/4505ps and
4510/4510ps
Desktop Laser Printers
User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................... 1-1
Overview 1-2
Sharing the Printer 1-5
Memory Considerations 1-6
Chapter 2 Handling Paper ............................................. 2-1
Overview 2-3
Paper Input 2-4
Paper Output 2-5
Paper Specifications 2-6
Paper Trays 2-8
Loading Paper 2-14
Selecting a Paper Source 2-22
Chapter 3 Using the Control Panel .............................. 3-1
Overview 3-3
Control Panel Features 3-4
Navigating the Menu System 3-8
Main Menu System 3-12
Language 3-14
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
❖
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s
PCL Menu 3-15
PostScript Menu 3-29
Interface Menu 3-37
System Menu 3-57
Test Menu 3-61
Reset Menu 3-65
Printer Settings that Affect Memory 3-67
Chapter 4 Using Fonts .................................................... 4-1
Overview 4-3
Fonts Resident on the Printer 4-5
Adding Fonts 4-9
Selecting a Font 4-12
Downloading Fonts 4-13
Chapter 5 Adding Printer Options ............................... 5-1
Overview 5-2
Installing a SIMM 5-4
Installing a Font Card 5-19
Chapter 6 Maintaining the Printer .............................. 6-1
Overview 6-2
Replacing the EP Cartridge 6-3
Fuser Cleaning Cycle 6-9
Adjusting the Print Density 6-12
Cleaning the Printer 6-13
Transporting the Printer 6-14
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ........................................... 7-1
Overview 7-2
Displayed Control Panel Messages 7-5
Paper Jams 7-19
Printer Operational Problems 7-26
ii ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s
Print Quality Problems 7-29
Appendix A Printer and Cable Specifications .............. A-1
4505 and 4505ps Printer Specifications A-2
4510 and 4510ps Printer Specifications A-4
Cable Specifications A-7
Appendix B Printer Commands (Escape Sequences) ... B-1
Xerox-Unique Settings B-2
PCL Printer Commands B-3
HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands B-21
Control Codes B-25
Appendix C I/O Port Polling .............................................. C-1
Appendix D Ordering Information ................................. D-1
Printer Options D-2
Additional Order Items D-7
Appendix E Environmental Specifications .................... E-1
Glossary ....................................................................... GL-1
Index ........................................................................ IX-1
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
❖
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Introduction
1
retpahC
Overview ............................................................................... 1-2
Printer Components 1-3
Factory Settings 1-4
Sharing the Printer ............................................................... 1-5
Memory Considerations ....................................................... 1-6
C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n
❖
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
The Xerox 4505, 4505ps, 4510, and 4510ps Desktop Laser
Printers offer the most cost-effective, best price-performance
solution to single-user or networked printing of any advanced
laser printer in their class.
Overview
At five pages per minute for the 4505/4505ps and ten pages
per minute for the 4510/4510ps, these printers provide
technically advanced features to ensure the high quality
Xerox printing you have come to expect:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
600 dpi and 300 dpi resolutions
Up to 10,000 pages per month for the 4505/4505ps
Up to 20,000 pages per month for the 4510/4510ps
Power saver mode
Remote User Interface (RUI)
TrueRes, for smooth edges and enhanced resolution
Optional lower base with 500-sheet, 250-sheet, or
30-envelope capacity
•
•
Optional 250-sheet trays supporting a variety of paper sizes
Multipurpose (MP) tray for single-sheet manual feeding
or small quantity specialized printing
•
•
•
Memory capacity up to 16 MBytes
Small footprint
PCL 5e emulation and PostScript Level 2 PDLs (page
description languages)
•
Automatic switching between PCL emulation (hereinafter
referred to as PCL) and PostScript (when the PostScript
option is installed)
•
•
•
Ethernet, LocalTalk, and Token Ring network options,
each with a variety of protocols
Printing from up to three simultaneously-active ports on
the 4505/4505ps and up to five on the 4510/4510ps
User installable printer and options
1-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
The key printer components are called out in Figure 1.1.
Printer
Components
Figure 1.1 Key printer components
Output Tray
Control Panel
Front Cover
Font Card Slots
Multipurpose (MP)
Paper Source
Power Switch
250-sheet Paper Tray
Network Port 1
Serial Port
Network Ports 2 & 3
(4510/4510ps only)
Parallel Port
Power Inlet
C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n
❖
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
The printer is controlled by numerous settings whose values
are pre-set at the factory. These values are called factory
settings.
Factory
Settings
If the factory settings do not suit the needs of your printing
environment, you can select a new setting in either of two
ways:
•
•
Control Panel on the printer. See Chapter 3: Using the
Control Panel.
Remote User Interface on the host computer. Refer to the
Document Services for Printing Guide.
1-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S h a r i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Particular care must be taken when changing settings for a
printer being shared by users such as those on a local area
network (LAN). When the printer is shared, settings must
accommodate the common needs of users.
Sharing the
Printer
Considerations for a networked environment include the
following:
•
•
•
Downloading fonts and macros by individual users may
consume printer memory. The sharing of downloaded
fonts must be coordinated. See Chapter 4: Using Fonts,
“Downloading Fonts” (page 4-13).
Switching between PCL and PostScript may purge
downloaded data. See Chapter 3: Using the Control
Panel, State Saving (page 3-28) for PCL and State Saving
(page 3-36) for PostScript.
Changing settings for Jam Recovery, Page Protection,
State Saving, or Resolution affect memory utilization. See
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, “Printer Settings that
Affect Memory” (page 3-67).
•
•
•
The type of interface. (See page 3-37, Appendix A, and
Appendix C.)
Auto Job End should be On. (See page 3-43, page 3-47,
page 3-53, page 3-56.)
Auto Continue should be On. (See page 3-59.)
LANs generally require a system or network administrator, a
person who orchestrates the use of the network. Refer to the
installation guide packaged with your network option for
more information.
C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n
❖
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M e m o r y C o n s i d e r a t i o n s
In today’s printing environments, technologies have
Memory
Considerations
advanced greatly but so have their corresponding memory
requirements. To make use of specialized graphics features,
fonts, and other applications on the market today, you may
find it necessary to increase memory size.
From the factory, the 4505 and 4510 are equipped with 2 MB
of resident base memory. The 4505ps and 4510ps are
equipped with 2 MB of resident base memory plus one 4 MB
SIMM (single in-line memory module) for a total of 6 MB.
Maximum memory capacity is 16 MB.
•
When is more memory needed?
— You receive out-of-memory error messages when
printing.
See Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel,“Printer
Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67) for more
information on how certain printer settings may affect
memory usage and performance. See also “Minimum
Memory Requirements” (page 3-69).
— You determine that expanded capability for
additional fonts, more complex documents, graphics,
or higher resolution is needed.
See Chapter 4: Using Fonts, “Downloading Fonts”
(page 4-13) for more information on how fonts affect
memory usage.
•
How is more memory added?
— Install a SIMM (single in-line memory module).
SIMMs are small circuit boards with memory chips
that can be installed on the printer controller board.
See Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options for more
information on SIMM installation.
1-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Handling Paper
2
retpahC
Overview ............................................................................... 2-3
Paper Input ............................................................................ 2-4
Paper Output ........................................................................ 2-5
Paper Specifications ............................................................. 2-6
Weight 2-6
Dimensions 2-6
Paper Trays ............................................................................ 2-8
Standard Tray 2-9
Multipurpose Tray 2-11
Optional Lower Base 2-13
Loading Paper ..................................................................... 2-14
Loading the Standard or Lower Paper Tray 2-14
Feeding the Multipurpose Paper Tray 2-18
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Letterhead, Pre-printed, Drilled,
or Label Paper 2-20
Loading Envelopes 2-21
Selecting a Paper Source .................................................... 2-22
PCL Paper Sources 2-22
Printing a Page 2-23
Source Mapping Settings 2-25
Factory Source Mapping Settings 2-26
Source Mapping Examples 2-27
Example 1 2-27
Example 2 2-28
Example 3 2-29
Example 4 2-30
Example 5 2-31
Example 6 2-32
Example 7 2-33
Example 8 2-34
2-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
This chapter provides specific information on paper handling:
Overview
•
•
•
Paper specifications
Paper sources and paper trays
Manual feeding and loading of paper, including
letterhead, pre-printed stationery, envelopes, labels, and
transparencies
•
•
Paper source mapping
Printing
In this guide, paper source refers to the slot or opening where
paper enters the printer. Paper tray refers to the container or
device that holds the paper.
Note
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r I n p u t
Paper input sources are the slots or openings where paper
enters the printer. As shown in Figure 2.1, the 4505/4505ps
and 4510/4510ps printers have as many as three paper input
sources.
Paper
Input
Figure 2.1 Paper input sources
Multipurpose (MP)
Paper Source
Standard Paper Source
Optional Lower Base
Paper Source
(250-sheet or
500-sheet)
2-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r O u t p u t
As shown in Figure 2.2, printed output is delivered face down
to the tray located on top of the printer. Output capacity is 250
sheets of standard weight paper.
Paper
Output
Figure 2.2 Output tray
Depending on paper weight, you may find the output tray
holds fewer than 250 sheets. Paper jams may occur if output
capacity is exceeded.
!
Caution
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Factors such as embossing, special edges, and general paper
quality affect paper handling.
Paper
Specifications
Paper weight specifications include the following:
Weight
•
•
250-sheet and 500-sheet paper trays support paper
weights of 60 gsm (16 lb) to 105 gsm (28 lb).
MP tray supports paper weights of 60 gsm (16 lb) to 135
gsm (36 lb).
For optimum printer performance, it is recommended that you
use paper made for laser printers and transparency film made
for Xerox laser printers and copiers.
Note
Figure 2.3 shows paper dimensions in millimeters and inches.
Dimensions
Figure 2.3 Paper dimensions
Paper Size
Dimensions
A4
210 x 297 mm
8.27 x 11.69 inches
Letter
B5 (ISO)
Executive
A5
216 x 279 mm
8.5 x 11 inches
176 x 250 mm
6.93 x 9.84 inches
184 x 267 mm
7.25 x 10.5 inches
148 x 210 mm
5.83 x 8.27 inches
Folio
216 x 330 mm
8.5 x 13 inches
2-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Figure 2.3 Paper dimensions (continued)
Paper Size
Dimensions
Legal
216 x 356 mm
8.5 x 14 inches
COM-10 Envelope
Monarch Envelope
DL Envelope
105 x 241 mm
4.13 x 9.5 inches
98 x 191 mm
3.87 x 7.5 inches
110 x 220 mm
4.33 x 8.66 inches
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
6.38 x 9.02 inches
The Xerox printer driver supports all paper sizes in
Figure 2.3. However, if you do not install—or your application
does not use—the Xerox printer driver, some of these paper
sizes may not be available for your use. Refer to the
Document Services for Printing Guide for more information
on the Xerox printer driver.
Note
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r T r a y s
As shown in Figure 2.4, the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps
printers are packaged with one 250-sheet paper tray and one
multipurpose (MP) tray. An optional lower base provides an
additional tray, as shown in Figure 2.4.
Paper
Trays
Figure 2.4 Input trays
Multipurpose (MP) Tray
Standard Paper Tray
Optional 250-sheet Lower
Base with Paper Tray
or
Optional 500-sheet Lower
Base with Paper Tray
2-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r T r a y s
The 250-sheet tray packaged with the printer is called a
Standard Tray
universal tray because it is adjustable to a variety of paper
sizes, as shown in Figure 2.5.
Figure 2.5 Universal tray
‡
Capacity
(Sheets)
†
Paper
A4
250
250
250
250
10
Letter (8.5 x 11)
Executive
A5
OHP (Overhead Projector) Film
(transparency)
Label paper
10
† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-6.
‡ Tray capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper. Maximum paper stack:
25mm/1 inch.
See “Loading Paper” (page 2-14) for further information on
the universal tray.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r T r a y s
Two other standard trays are available for the printer, as
shown in Figure 2.6.
Figure 2.6 Additional standard trays
‡
Capacity
†
Optional Tray
Legal
Paper
(Sheets)
250
250
250
30
Folio (8.5 x 13)
Legal (8.5 x 14)
Letter (8.5 x 11)
COM-10
Monarch
DL
Envelope
30
30
C5
30
† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-6.
‡ Tray capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper. Maximum paper stack:
25mm/1 inch.
To use letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper in
the standard tray, see Figure 2.8 (page 2-20) for paper
orientation. See Figure 2.9 (page 2-21) for envelope
orientation.
Note
2-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r T r a y s
The multipurpose (MP) tray provides for manually feeding a
single sheet or loading small quantities of paper, envelopes,
transparencies, or labels (see Figure 2.7).
Multipurpose
Tray
Figure 2.7 MP tray
‡
Capacity
(Sheets)
†
Paper
A4
50
50
50
50
50
50
10
5
Letter (8.5 x 11)
B5 (ISO)
A5
Executive
Folio
Legal (8.5 x 14)
Monarch
Com-10
C5
5
5
DL
5
Transparencies
Labels
35
Less than 4 mm
(.15 in)
† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-6.
‡ Capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper. The maximum paper
stack size for the MP tray is 4 mm (.15 inches).
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r T r a y s
Typical uses of the MP tray include:
•
Printing a document whose first page is to be printed on
letterhead and the rest from the standard tray. See
Figure 2.8 (page 2-20) for the orientation of headed paper
in the MP tray.
•
Printing documents that require pages of special paper
size, color, or other attribute.
To use letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper in
the MP tray, see Figure 2.8 (page 2-20) for paper orientation.
See Figure 2.9 (page 2-21) for envelope orientation.
Note
2-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r T r a y s
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers accommodate one
of two optional lower bases with a paper tray:
Optional Lower
Base
•
The 250-sheet lower base equipped with a universal tray
In the 250-sheet lower base, you can also use either the
legal or envelope tray shown in Figure 2.6 (page 2-10).
•
The 500-sheet lower base equipped with either an A4 or
Letter (8.5 x 11) tray
There is also an additional Letter tray or A4 tray available
for the 500-sheet lower base.
To order a lower base or tray option, see
Appendix D: Ordering Information.
250-sheet or 30-envelope trays may be used for either the
standard tray or the 250-sheet lower base.
500-sheet trays may be used in the 500-sheet lower base only.
Note
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Loading Paper
To load paper into the standard or lower paper tray, follow the
steps below.
Loading the
Standard or
Lower Paper Tray
When loading the
1
standard tray, remove
the multipurpose tray,
if it is installed.
2-14 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Remove the tray from
the printer.
2
Place the tray on a flat
surface.
If necessary, adjust the
end guide to the
3
desired paper size and
the side guide to its
widest position.
Make sure that the end
guide is positioned in the
appropriate detent for
the paper size installed in
the tray. If the guide is
not positioned in the
!
Caution
detent, the printer may
not correctly recognize
the installed paper size.
See page 2-9 and page 2-13 for more information on
the standard and lower paper trays.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Load paper in the tray,
making sure the paper
is tucked under the
metal corners.
4
For best performance,
load paper with curl side
up.
Note
If you are loading
letterhead, pre-printed
stationery, or drilled
paper, see Figure 2.8
(page 2-20). If loading
envelopes, see
Figure 2.9 (page 2-21).
If necessary, adjust the
side guide to the
5
correct paper width.
2-16 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Insert the paper tray in
the printer.
6
Reinstall the
multipurpose tray if it
was removed at Step 1.
With a lower base installed, do not remove the standard tray
while the printer is feeding from the lower tray.
!
Caution
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L o a d i n g P a p e r
To feed paper into the multipurpose (MP) tray, follow the
steps below.
Feeding the
Multipurpose
Paper Tray
It is assumed the MP tray has already been installed. If not,
install it by referring to the Setting Up Guide packaged with
the printer.
Adjust the side guides
1
to the desired paper
size.
See “Multipurpose
Tray” (page 2-11).
2-18 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Feed paper or
envelopes into the MP
tray.
2
If you are loading
letterhead, pre-printed
stationery, or drilled
paper, see Figure 2.8
(page 2-20). See
Figure 2.9 (page 2-21)
for envelopes.
Whenever you open the front cover, you must first remove
the MP tray. Reinsert it once you have closed the front cover.
!
Caution
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Figure 2.8 illustrates the paper orientation needed to print
headed, pre-printed, drilled, or label paper.
Loading
Letterhead,
Pre-printed,
Of course, you may need to adjust your software application’s
Drilled, or printing margins to:
Label Paper
•
•
•
Prevent overwriting the letterhead or pre-printed images.
Prevent overwriting the drilled holes.
Accommodate an individual label size.
Label paper may be loaded in the universal or MP tray only.
Note
Figure 2.8 Loading letterhead, pre-printed, drilled, or label paper
(face down)
(face up)
2-20 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L o a d i n g P a p e r
Figure 2.9 illustrates the envelope orientation needed to print
COM-10, Monarch, DL, or C5 envelopes in the 30-envelope
tray and the MP tray.
Loading
Envelopes
Envelopes may only be loaded in the standard 30-envelope
tray or the MP tray. See Figure 2.6 (page 2-10) for more
information on the envelope tray.
Note
Figure 2.9 Loading envelopes
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
For a print job, your software application sends information,
called the Printer Command Language (PCL), to the printer to
communicate paper source and page size. How the printer
interprets the PCL command for paper source and page size
depends on the printer menu settings for Source Mapping
and MP Tray Size. If PCL commands for paper source and
page size are not sent to the printer, the printer menu settings
for Paper Size and Default Source are used. See
Selecting a
Paper Source
Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel for further information on
these and all PCL Menu settings (page 3-18).
PostScript functions differently than PCL. Refer to the
PostScript Installation Instructions for more information.
Note
Paper source is a term that describes the tray, feeder, or slot
PCL Paper Sources
from which the printer feeds paper.
PCL, and therefore your printer, recognizes the six paper
sources shown in Figure 2.10, which may, or may not, appear
in your software application.
Figure 2.10 Six PCL paper sources
PCL Paper Source
Standard
Alternate Names
Upper, Paper Tray, Paper Cassette
Manual, Manual Feed
Manual
Manual Envelope
Lower
Envelope Manual Feed
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Paper Deck
2-22 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
When a print job is received by the printer, the sequence to
select the paper tray for each page is as follows:
Printing a Page
1. Page size is established.
If page size is not sent by the application, the PCL Menu
setting called Paper Size is used.
2. Paper source is established.
If a paper source is sent by the application, it will be one
of the six PCL paper sources listed in Figure 2.10
(page 2-22).
If paper source is not sent by the application, the PCL
Menu setting called Default Source is used. Some
software applications have a paper source called “Auto
Select” or “Auto Sheet Feed.” When used, this results in
a PCL paper source being omitted from the print job.
3. When the printer is ready to print the page, tray sequence
is established.
For the paper source chosen in the second step above, a
tray or sequence of trays is taken from the PCL Menu
Source Mapping setting for that source. For settings, see
Figure 2.11 (page 2-25).
4. The printer searches in the tray or in any tray in the tray
sequence for the correct page size from the first step
above.
In a tray sequence, the trays are searched left to right as
they appear in the Source Mapping setting. For example,
for sequence “Std-Low-MP”, the standard tray is
searched first, the lower tray second, and the MP tray
third. The MP paper size is taken from the PCL Menu
setting called MP Tray Size.
5. If a tray with the correct paper size is found, the page is
printed from that tray.
If no tray with the correct paper size is found, the tray
sequence and paper size are displayed on the Control
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
Panel along with a message to load the correct paper size.
Printing halts.
— Put paper of the requested size in a tray in the tray
sequence and the page will be printed.
— Or, press Enter
to print from the first tray in the
tray sequence, regardless of paper size. If that tray
becomes empty, the next tray with the same paper
size will be used. This source and size will be used
until the printer receives a new page containing a
PCL paper source, page size, or reset command.
2-24 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
For each of the six PCL paper sources listed in Figure 2.10
(page 2-22), a Source Mapping setting from Figure 2.11 is
used. You may change settings depending on your printing
needs. For details, see “Factory Source Mapping Settings”
(page 2-26), “Source Mapping Examples” (page 2-27), and
Source Mapping (page 3-22).
Source Mapping
Settings
Figure 2.11 Source Mapping settings
Source Mapping
Description
setting
Standard
MP Tray
Tray or tray sequence to be used for each
of the six PCL paper sources.
Standard-MP
MP-Standard†
Lower
Additional settings that appear only
when a lower base (page 2-13) is
installed.
Standard-Lower
Lower-Standard
Lower-MP
Std-Low-MP
Low-Std-MP
MP-Lower†
MP-Std-Low†
MP-Low-Std†
† Use sequences starting with MP to print the first pages of a print job on special
paper stock by placing the required number of special stock sheets in the MP tray
(page 2-11).
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
Figure 2.12 shows the factory Source Mapping settings for
the six PCL paper sources, and how the settings change when
the optional lower base is installed and Reset Menus is
implemented. See Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, “Reset
Menu” (page 3-65).
Factory Source
Mapping Settings
Figure 2.12 Factory settings for Source Mapping
Without
PCL Paper Source
With Lower Base
Lower Base
Standard
Standard
Standard-Lower
MP Tray
Manual
MP Tray
MP Tray
Standard
Standard
MP Tray
Manual Envelope
Lower
MP Tray
Lower-Standard
Lower-Standard
MP Tray
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Only the Xerox printer driver allows access to the entire
range of PCL paper source and source mapping settings
specifically designed for the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps
printers. Refer to the Document Services for Printing Guide.
Note
2-26 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
Review the following Source Mapping examples to take full
Source Mapping
Examples
advantage of the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps capabilities.
All examples assume that Default Source is set to Standard.
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to load as
much paper in the printer as possible. You use only one size
of paper. You do not do manual feeding.
Example 1
1. Load the standard and MP trays with regular paper stock.
2. Set Source Mapping for “Standard” to “Standard-MP.”
3. Set MP Tray Size to the same size as the regular stock.
4. In either your software application or the Xerox printer
driver, set paper source to the standard tray.
The printer will pull paper from the standard tray until it is
empty, then from the MP tray. When the standard tray is
reloaded, the printer will pull paper from it again.
The Source Mapping setting determines from where the
printer pulls paper.
For the paper sources you intend not to use, always set Source
Mapping to the same setting as that used for your regular
paper stock. You will avoid unexpected results if those paper
sources are used by mistake.
Note
The examples suggest using specific PCL paper sources but
generally you may substitute any source to fit your printing
needs.
Note
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
To avoid a paper jam, do not remove the standard or lower
tray while the printer is feeding paper.
!
Caution
You have a lower base installed. You want to load as much
paper in the printer as possible. You use only one size of
paper. You do not do manual feeding.
Example 2
1. Load the standard, lower, and MP trays with regular
paper stock.
2. Set Source Mapping for “Standard” to “Low-Std-MP.”
3. Set MP Tray Size to the same size as the regular stock.
4. In either your software application or the Xerox printer
driver, set paper source to the standard tray.
The printer will pull paper from the lower tray until it is
empty, then from the standard tray until it is empty, then from
the MP tray. When either the lower or standard tray is
reloaded, the printer will pull paper from it again.
2-28 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to print
mostly on Letter (8.5 x 11) paper but sometimes on Legal
(8.5 x 14). You do not intend to do manual feeding.
Example 3
1. Load the standard tray with Letter paper stock.
2. Load the MP tray with Legal paper stock.
3. Set Source Mapping for “Standard” to “Standard.”
4. Set Source Mapping for “Manual” to “MP Tray.”
5. Set MP Tray Size to “Legal (8.5x14).”
6. In either your software application or the Xerox printer
driver, set paper source to:
— Standard tray for Letter pages.
— Manual (MP Tray) for Legal pages.
The printer will pull Letter paper from the standard tray. It
will pull Legal paper from the MP tray.
Alternatively, you could set Source Mapping for “Standard”
to “Standard-MP” and set your application paper source to
the standard tray for both Letter and Legal size pages. The
printer will automatically switch between the trays
according to the paper size requested. The disadvantage is
that Control Panel messages may be misleading. Whether
alerting you to load Letter or Legal paper, the Control Panel
will always display “Standard-MP” as the location to load
that paper size. You must know which paper size goes into
which tray.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
You have a lower base installed. You also have the optional
standard legal tray (page 2-10). You want to print mostly on
Letter (8.5 x 11) paper but sometimes on Legal (8.5 x 14). You
intend to do manual feeding.
Example 4
1. Load the lower tray with Letter paper stock.
2. Load the standard tray with Legal paper stock.
3. Empty the MP tray.
4. Set Source Mapping for “Standard” to “Standard.”
5. Set Source Mapping for “Lower” to “Lower.”
6. Set Source Mapping for “Manual” to “MP Tray.”
7. Set Default Source to “Lower” to take care of print jobs
that do not contain a paper source selection.
8. In either your software application or the Xerox printer
driver, set paper source to:
— Lower tray for Letter pages.
— Standard tray for Legal pages.
— Manual (MP Tray) for pages to be manually fed.
The printer will pull Letter pages from the lower tray. It will
pull Legal pages from the standard tray. For each manual
page, the printer halts and the Control Panel displays a
message requesting the correct size paper to be manually
placed in the MP tray. Place one page in the MP tray and it
will feed if the requested paper size is the same size as MP
Tray Size. If it is not, you must press Enter
Alternatively, you could set the Source Mapping for “Lower”
to “Lower-Standard” and set your application paper source to
the lower tray for both Letter and Legal pages. The printer
will automatically switch between the trays according to the
paper size requested. The only disadvantage is that Control
Panel messages may be misleading. Whether alerting you to
load Letter or Legal paper, the Control Panel will always
2-30 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
display “Lower-Standard” as the location to load that paper
size. You must know which paper size goes into which tray.
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to print
mostly on white A4 paper but sometimes on pre-printed A4
paper. You occasionally print on DL envelopes.
Example 5
1. Load the standard tray with white A4 paper stock.
2. Load the MP tray with pre-preprinted A4 paper stock
(face down).
3. Set Source Mapping for “Standard” to “Standard.”
4. Set Source Mapping for “Manual” and “Manual
Envelope” to “MP Tray.”
5. Set MP Tray Size to “A4 (210x297)”
6. In either your software application or the Xerox printer
driver, set paper source to:
— Standard tray for white A4 pages.
— Manual (MP Tray) for pre-printed A4 pages.
— Manual (MP Tray) for DL envelopes. (You could have
also set paper source to Manual Envelope for DL
envelopes.)
The printer will pull white A4 paper from the standard tray. It
will pull pre-printed A4 pages from the MP tray. For each DL
envelope, the printer halts and the Control Panel displays a
message requesting a DL envelope to be loaded in the MP
tray. Remove the pre-printed paper and place one envelope
in the MP tray. Press Enter
to print.
Additionally, you might set Source Mapping for “Lower” and
“Large Capacity” sources to “MP Tray” so that you could
select the lower tray or large capacity for pre-printed paper if
more convenient.
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
You have a lower base (with either a universal tray or an A4
tray) installed, and you have a DL envelope tray—see
Figure 2.6 (page 2-10). You want to print mostly on white A4
paper but sometimes on DL envelopes. Occasionally, you
print on color or pre-printed A4 paper.
Example 6
1. Load the lower tray with white A4 paper stock.
2. Insert the DL envelope tray, filled with DL envelopes, in
the standard paper source.
3. Load the MP tray with color or pre-printed A4 paper stock
(face down).
4. Set Source Mapping for “Standard” to “MP Tray.”
5. Set Source Mapping for “Lower” to “Lower.”
6. Set Source Mapping for “Manual” and “Manual
Envelope” to “Standard.”
7. Set MP Tray Size to “A4 (210x297).”
8. Set Default Source to “Lower” to cover print jobs that do
not contain a paper source selection.
9. In either your application or the Xerox printer driver, set
paper source to:
— Lower tray for white A4 pages.
— Standard tray for color or pre-printed A4 pages.
— Manual for DL envelopes.
Because of the Source Mapping settings in steps 4-6, above,
the printer will pull white A4 paper from the lower tray. It will
pull DL envelopes from the standard tray. It will pull color or
pre-printed A4 pages from the MP tray.
Make sure there is one sheet of A4 stationery in the MP tray
each time you print this document.
2-32 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to use
pre-printed stationery for the first page and regular stock for
the other pages of your document. Your software application
has the capability to ask for the first page of a document from
a different source than the remainder of the document. The
Xerox PCL 5e emulation Windows printer driver also has this
capability. It is assumed your pre-printed stationery is the
same size as your regular stock.
Example 7
1. Load the standard tray with regular paper stock.
2. Load the MP tray with pre-printed stationery (face down).
3. Set Source Mapping for “Standard” to “Standard.”
4. Set Source Mapping for “Lower” to “MP Tray.”
5. Set MP Tray Size to the same size as your pre-printed
stationery.
6. In either your software application or the Xerox PCL 5e
emulation Windows printer driver, set paper source for
the first page to Lower and set paper source for the
remaining pages to Standard.
The printer will pull the first page from the MP tray and all
other pages from the standard tray.
Alternatively, you could substitute any paper source, except
standard, for “Lower” in the fourth and sixth steps above.
Refer to the Document Services for Printing Guide for more
information about the printer driver.
Note
C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r
❖
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
P a p e r S o u r c e
You do not have a lower base installed. You want to use
pre-printed stationery for the first page and regular stock for
the other pages of your document. Neither your software
application nor your printer driver has the capability to ask
for the first page of a document from a different source than
the remainder of the document. It is assumed your
Example 8
pre-printed stationery is the same size as your regular stock.
1. Load the standard tray with regular paper stock.
2. Put one page of the pre-printed stationery in the MP tray
(face down).
3. Set Source Mapping for “Standard” to “MP-Standard.”
4. Set MP Tray Size to the same size as your pre-printed
stationery.
5. In your application, set paper source to Standard.
The printer will pull the first page from the MP tray and all
other pages from the standard tray.
Make sure there is one sheet of pre-printed stationery in the
MP tray each time you print this document.
2-34 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Using the Control Panel
3
retpahC
Overview ............................................................................... 3-3
Control Panel Features ......................................................... 3-4
The Display 3-4
The Indicator Lights 3-5
The Keys 3-6
Navigating the Menu System .............................................. 3-8
Menu System Indicators 3-9
Setting a Menu Option 3-10
Main Menu System ............................................................. 3-12
Language ............................................................................. 3-14
Language Options 3-14
PCL Menu ............................................................................ 3-15
PCL Menu Hierarchy 3-15
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL Menu Options 3-18
PostScript Menu .................................................................. 3-29
PostScript Menu Hierarchy 3-30
PostScript Menu Options 3-32
Interface Menu ................................................................... 3-37
Interface Menu Hierarchy 3-37
Parallel Menu Options 3-41
Serial Menu Options 3-45
LocalTalk Menu Option 3-50
Ethernet Menu Options 3-51
Token Ring Menu Options 3-54
System Menu ...................................................................... 3-57
System Menu Hierarchy 3-57
System Menu Options 3-58
Test Menu ............................................................................ 3-61
Test Menu Hierarchy 3-61
Test Menu Functions 3-62
Reset Menu ......................................................................... 3-65
Reset Menu Hierarchy 3-65
Reset Menu Functions 3-65
Printer Settings that Affect Memory ................................. 3-67
Minimum Memory Requirements 3-69
3-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
Shown in Figure 3.1, the Control Panel is both informative
and interactive. Not only does it display status and user
actions required, the Control Panel also enables you to
change printer settings to control how the 4505/4505ps and
4510/4510ps printers operate in your environment.
Overview
Figure 3.1 Control Panel
This chapter describes the following:
•
•
•
Control Panel display and keys
Control Panel menu selections
Guidelines for configuring the printer to meet your
printing needs
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s
The three major components of the Control Panel are shown
Control Panel
Features
in Figure 3.2:
Figure 3.2 Control Panel components
Three Indicator Lights
Two-line by 16-character Display
Eight Control Keys
The Display
The Control Panel display:
•
Presents a hierarchy of menu options and settings to
configure and control the printer.
See “Navigating the Menu System” (page 3-8) for
information on the menu system hierarchy.
•
Informs you of printer status conditions such as when
toner is low, where to load paper, and so on.
See “Displayed Control Panel Messages” (page 7-5) for a
complete list of messages.
3-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s
Shown in Figure 3.3, three indicator lights—also called LEDs
for light-emitting diodes—show the activity status of the
printer.
The Indicator
Lights
Figure 3.3 Indicator lights
Online
Form Feed
Ready
Online
Ready
___
Figure 3.4 describes the function of each indicator light.
Figure 3.4 Indicator light functions
Indicator
Description
The light is on when the printer is warmed up and available for printing.
The light goes off when:
Online
• You press Online
to take the printer offline.
• There is a failure or operation that makes the printer unavailable.
The light comes on when a partial page has been prepared for printing, rather than an
entire page.
Form Feed
Ready
To eject the partial page, press Form Feed
when the printer is offline.
key.
See Figure 3.5 (page 3-6) for information on the Form Feed
The light comes on when the printer is powered ON and remains lit unless a failure makes
the printer unavailable.
The Ready light flashes to indicate that the printer is receiving data to print.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s
As described in Figure 3.5, the Control Panel keypad consists
The Keys
of eight keys, identified as international symbols and labeled
in English.
Figure 3.5 Control Panel keys and their functions
Key
Description
Toggles between online and offline.
Online
When online, the printer is able to receive and print pages.
When offline, page processing and printing halts, but the printer is still able to respond to
status requests. You must take the printer offline to:
• Access the menu system with Menu
or Reset
• Insert or remove a font card.
• Perform tasks such as forcing a form feed for a partially printed page.
The printer goes offline automatically when it has a fault condition such as a paper jam or
an open cover. Use Online
to put the printer back online after correcting such
conditions.
The online message indicates a “closed” switch; that is, printing continues:
Online ___
The offline message indicates an “open” switch; that is, printing halts:
Offline _/_
Displays the Reset Menu and the first function: Reset Printer.
Press Up or Down repeatedly to step through the other Reset Menu functions
one at a time. See“Reset Menu” (page 3-65).
Reset
The printer must be offline for Reset
to function.
Prints a partial page if one exists in the printer.
Form Feed
It does not send a blank sheet of paper through the printer.
The printer must be offline for the Form Feed
key to function.
Form Feed
only works in PCL mode, not in PostScript mode. See “PCL Menu
Options” (page 3-18) for more information.
Displays the Main Menu and the first submenu: Language.
Menu
In any submenu, press Menu
to take you to the top of the Main Menu. See “Main
Menu System” (page 3-12) for a full description.
The printer must be offline for Menu
to function.
3-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s
Figure 3.5 Control Panel keys and their functions (continued)
Key
Esc
Description
In the menu system, exits the current menu level and returns to the previous one.
Press Esc at any time in the menu system to take you to the previous level. No
changes to values will be saved unless you first press Enter
Press Esc
while at Reset Menu or the top level of Main Menu to exit either menu.
In the menu system, accesses, sets, or invokes the displayed submenu, value, or function:
Enter
• When a submenu is displayed, press Enter
to access a submenu.
• When a printer setting is displayed, press Enter
to set the current value as the
default value.
• In PCL, press Enter
to override a paper mismatch.
• When a printer action is displayed, such as any of the Test Menu (page 3-61) or Reset
Menu (page 3-65) functions, press Enter
to invoke the action.
Out of the menu system, acts as a Continue key:
• After certain error conditions when Auto Continue is Off, press Enter
the printing process. See Auto Continue (page 3-59) for more information.
to continue
In the menu system, scrolls backward (up) through submenus or through the current list of
values or functions.
Up
For numeric values such as number of Copies, press Up
to increase the number.
to display the last item
Scrolling wraps—if the first item in a list is displayed, press Up
in the list.
Press Up
for more than two seconds to scroll continuously. During scrolling, there
may be a greater increment for each step than that for single presses. For example, for the
PCL Menu setting Pitch (page 3-20), the single press increment is 0.01 whereas the scrolling
increment is 1.00.
In the menu system, scrolls forward (down) through the submenus or through the current
list of values or actions.
Down
For numeric values such as number of Copies, press Down
to decrease the number.
to display the first
Scrolling wraps—if the last item in a list is displayed, press Down
item in the list.
Press Down
for more than two seconds to scroll continuously. During scrolling, there
may be a greater increment for each step than that for single presses. For example, for the
PCL Menu setting Pitch (page 3-20), the single press increment is 0.01 whereas the scrolling
increment is 1.00.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps Control Panel contains
two menu structures:
Navigating the
Menu System
•
Main Menu and its submenus:
— Language
— PCL Menu
— PostScript Menu (when the PostScript option is
installed)
— Interface Menu
— System Menu
— Test Menu
The Main Menu system is accessed by pressing
Menu
Each of the submenus may have other
submenus, settings, or functions. See “Main Menu
System” (page 3-12) for more information.
•
Reset Menu and its functions:
— Reset Printer
— Reset Menus
— Reset I/f Cards (available only in firmware release 4.0
and when a network option is installed)
— Reset All
— Cancel PS Job (when the PostScript option is
installed)
The Reset Menu is accessed by pressing Reset
There are no submenus. See “Reset Menu” (page 3-65).
Take the printer offline (page 3-6) to access the Main Menu or
the Reset Menu.
Note
3-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m
As shown in Figure 3.6, three symbols called indicators may
Menu System
Indicators
appear on menu displays.
Figure 3.6 Menu indicator symbols on the Control Panel display
Symbol
Description
Example
>
Indicates another menu level below this one.
Main Menu
Language
>
=
=
*
Indicates that a value or setting follows the option on Language
the bottom line.
Français
After a setting, indicates it is the current value.
Language
English
=
*
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m
To set a Main Menu option or to invoke a Test Menu or Reset
Menu function, follow the steps below:
Setting a
Menu Option
Press Online
You will see:
Offline
to take the printer offline.
1
_/_
Press a key...
Press Menu
to access the Main Menu or press
2
3
Reset
to access the Reset Menu.
Press Down
or Up
to scroll through the list
of submenus, options, or functions.
When you see the submenu, option, or function you
want, press Enter
4
If you selected a submenu or option you did not want,
press Esc
to return to the previous level; then
make the selection you want and press Enter
to
accept it.
If necessary, repeat Step 3 and Step 4 to go through
submenu levels to reach all desired options or
functions.
5
If many possibilities exist, such as 1 through 99 for
number of Copies, you can scroll quickly by holding
down the key.
After pressing Enter
to accept a setting, you will
briefly see on the top line of the display:
* saved *
This indicates the value has been saved as the current
setting.
3-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m
You may either continue to work in the menu system
by repeating the steps above, or exit and return to
normal operation by pressing Online
6
If you press Online
before Enter
the value will
not be saved.
Note
Other ways to exit a menu option or the menu system
completely are as follows:
•
In the Main Menu, press Menu
the top of the Main Menu.
to return to
•
Press Esc
from Main Menu or Reset Menu to
exit the menu system and display the following
message:
Offline
_/_
Press a key...
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M a i n M e n u S y s t e m
The Main Menu system is hierarchical, based on a cascading
system of submenus, each containing other submenus or
options designed to configure the printer for your
environment. The Main Menu hierarchy is depicted in
Figure 3.7 (page 3-13).
Main Menu
System
In this chapter, factory settings are shown boldfaced and
followed by an asterisk (*). See Chapter 1: Introduction
(page 1-4) for a definition of factory setting.
Note
When you change a factory setting or an existing setting to a
new value, the new value becomes the current setting.
On the printer, the current setting always appears first in the
list of values and is followed by an asterisk (*). The other
possible values are located by pressing Up
Down to scroll through the list.
or
See “Reset Menu” (page 3-65) for information on how to
revert to factory settings.
3-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M a i n M e n u S y s t e m
Figure 3.7 Main Menu hierarchy
Language
Menu
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Français canad.
Italiano
Português (BRA)
PCL Menu
See Figure 3.9 (page 3-16).
See Figure 3.11 (page 3-31).
See Figure 3.13 (page 3-38).
See Figure 3.19 (page 3-57).
See Figure 3.21 (page 3-61).
PostScript Menu†
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L a n g u a g e
Language includes a list of international languages used to
display messages on the Control Panel and used to print text
on the Configuration Sheet (page 3-62).
Language
Figure 3.8 shows the Language options and their English
equivalent. See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the
steps to find and change the language option.
Language
Options
The Language option is not changed by the Reset Menus
function (page 3-66).
Note
Figure 3.8 Language options
Options
English Equivalent
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
German
International English
Spanish
French
Français canad.
Italiano
French Canadian
Italian
Português (BRA)
Brazilian Portuguese
3-14 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
PCL Menu options establish the default configuration for the
printer. PCL (Printer Control Language) is used by software
applications to send information and instructions to the
printer.
PCL Menu
The PCL Menu hierarchy is depicted in Figure 3.9
(page 3-16).
PCL Menu
Hierarchy
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.9 PCL Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
Menu
Language
PCL Menu
Copies
1* - 99
PostScript Menu
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
Font Source
Internal*
Upper†
Lower†
Soft†
Font Number
Pitch
0* - 999
.44 - 99.99 by .01
(10.00*)
Point Size
4.00 - 999.75 by .25
(12.00*)
Default Source
Standard*
Manual (MP)
Lower‡
Source Mapping
Standard
Manual
Standard
MP Tray
Manual Envelope
Standard-MP
MP-Standard
Lower‡
Lower
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Standard-Lower‡
Lower-Standard‡
Lower-MP‡
Std-Low-MP‡
Low-Std-MP‡
MP-Lower‡
MP-Std-Low‡
MP-Low-Std‡
Appears only when the default font is scalable.
†Appears only when font cards are installed or downloaded fonts are available.
‡Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.
3-16 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.9 PCL Menu hierarchy (continued)
Legal (8.5x14)
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)*
(USA)
Paper Size
MP Tray Size
A4 (210x297)*
(Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
Monarch
DL
C5
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Form Length
005 - 128
64* (Europe)
60* (USA)
Desktop
ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L5
ISO-4 UK
ISO-6 ASCII
ISO-11 Swedish
ISO-15 Italian
ISO-17 Spanish
ISO-21 German
ISO-60 Norw. v1
ISO-69 French
Legal
Symbol Set
Page Protection
Off*
A4 (210x297)
Legal (8.5x14)
Letter (8.5x11)
Math-8
Microsoft Publ.
PC-8
PC-8 DN
PC-8 Tk
PC-850
PC-852
Pi Font
PS Math
PS Text
Roman-8*
Ventura Int’l.
Ventura Math
Ventura US
Win 3.0
Jam Recovery
Resolution
TrueRes
Note: The default
for Jam Recovery is
On for firmware
release 4.0. The
default is Off (as
shown at right) for
releases > 4.0. To
determine the
Off*
On
300x300
600x600*
firmware release of
your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
Off
On*
Win L1
Win L2
Win L5
State Saving
Off*
On
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
PCL Menu options and their settings are described in
Figure 3.10 (page 3-19). Factory settings are boldfaced,
followed by an asterisk (*). See “Setting a Menu Option”
(page 3-10) for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer
to the Document Services for Printing Guide to use the RUI to
change settings.
PCL Menu
Options
Settings for certain PCL Menu options may be overridden
from many software applications. If your software application
specifies a value for any option below, the printer PCL Menu
setting will be ignored:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copies
Font Source
Font Number
Pitch
Point Size
Default Source
Paper Size
Orientation
Form Length
Symbol Set
The Xerox printer driver allows your software application to
specify three additional PCL Menu options:
•
•
•
Page Protection
Resolution
TrueRes
Note
3-18 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Copies
Setting
Description
1* - 99
Number of times each page is printed.
Most software applications override this setting. If
your application does not, the printer assumes the
default setting here.
Internal*
Upper†
Lower†
Soft†
Location of the default font in PCL.
Font Source
Internal refers to the font set residing in the printer’s
permanent memory. These fonts are resident in the
printer and cannot be altered.
Upper and Lower refer to the two font card slots and
appear only when a font card is installed in a slot. See
Chapter 1: Introduction (page 1-3) for location of the
font card slots.
When a font card contains its own default font, the
current Font Source is overridden. You must change
the Font Source manually if you do not want to use
the default font on the font card.
Soft refers to fonts permanently downloaded to
printer memory. Soft appears only if there is a
permanently downloaded font.
†
Upper and Lower appear
The Font Source setting returns to its
factory setting (“Internal”) if Symbol Set
(page 3-25) is changed.
only when a font card is
installed. Soft appears
when there is a
Note
downloaded font.
If the Font Source setting specifies a
location other than “Internal”, Font
Number (page 3-20) reverts to 0
automatically.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
0* - 999
Default font in PCL.
Font Number
Only Font Number values valid for the Font Source
location (page 3-19) are displayed. For example, if you
have internal fonts only, the maximum Font Number
is 50.
Font Number values are printed on the PCL Font
List (page 3-63) in the first column. Print a PCL Font
List to find the correct number to use with this
setting.
The Font Number setting returns to its
factory setting (0) if the Symbol Set
(page 3-25) default is changed.
Note
If the Font Source setting (page 3-19)
specifies a location other than
“Internal”, Font Number reverts to 0
automatically.
.44 - 99.99 by .01
(10.00*)
Number of characters per inch (cpi) for the font
represented by Font Number (page 3-20).
Pitch
Appears only when the Font Number setting
specifies a scalable fixed pitch font, such as Courier.
Up
increments pitch at .01 cpi, from .44 to
decrements at .01 cpi.
99.99 cpi. Down
Most software applications override this setting. If
your application does not, the printer assumes the
default setting here.
3-20 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
4.00 - 999.75 by .25
(12.00*)
Point size (a measurement for type height, 1 point
equals 0.351 mm or approximately 1/72 inch) for the
font represented by Font Number (page 3-20).
Point Size
Appears only when the Font Number setting
specifies a scalable proportional spaced font, such as
Times New Roman.
Most software applications override this setting. If
your application does not, the printer assumes the
default setting here.
Standard*
Manual (MP)
Lower†
Default paper source in PCL if none is specified by
your software application.
Default Source
The printer uses Default Source when there is no
paper source specified in the print job. Some software
applications have a paper source selection called
“Auto Select” or “Auto Sheet Feed” which usually
results in the omission of a paper source selection in a
print job.
When the printer uses Default Source, Source
Mapping (page 3-22) is used to determine the actual
tray or slot from which the printer pulls paper. See
Chapter 2: Handling Paper, “Selecting a Paper
Source” (page 2-22) for more information on the
interaction of Default Source and Source Mapping.
†
Appears only when an
optional lower base is
installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Standard
MP Tray
Source mapping enables you to control from your
software application the location from which the
printer pulls paper.
Source Mapping
Options (Paper Sources):
Standard-MP
MP-Standard
Lower†
Standard
Manual
Manual Envelope
Lower
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Each of the six paper sources that can be requested
through your application maps to one of the Source
Mapping settings.
Standard-Lower†
Lower-Standard†
Lower-MP†
Standard is the factory setting for the Standard,
Lower, and Large Capacity paper sources. MP Tray is
the factory setting for Manual, Manual Envelope, and
Envelope Feeder. See Figure 2.12 (page 2-26) for
factory settings with and without a lower base
installed.
Std-Low-MP†
Low-Std-MP†
MP-Lower†
MP-Std-Low†
MP-Low-Std†
When a paper source (e.g., Standard) is mapped to a
sequence of trays (e.g., Standard-MP), the printer may
switch between them for two purposes:
1) To increase paper capacity.
When the current tray becomes empty, the
printer automatically switches to the next tray in
the sequence, provided the paper size is the
same.
2) To search for the correct paper size to print a
page.
If the paper size specified in your software
application does not match what is loaded in the
current tray, the printer automatically searches
the next tray in the sequence for a paper size that
matches.
For more information on taking full advantage of
Source Mapping and for detailed examples of usage,
see “Selecting a Paper Source” (page 2-22).
†
Appears only when an
optional lower base is
installed.
3-22 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Legal (8.5x14)
Paper size used to print a page if no paper size is
specified by your software application.
Paper Size
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)* (USA)
A4 (210x297)* (Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
The Xerox printer driver supports all Paper Size
settings. However, without the Xerox printer driver
installed, not all paper sizes may be supported by your
software application.
The Defaults setting (page 3-60) in the System Menu
determines whether the factory setting for Paper
Size is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11)”.
Monarch
DL
C5
See Figure 2.3 (page 2-6)
for more paper
dimensions.
Legal (8.5x14)
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)* (USA)
A4 (210x297)* (Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
MP Tray Size communicates the paper size feeding
through the MP tray. The MP tray does not have a size
sensor; therefore, you must explicitly tell the printer
what MP tray paper size to expect. The printer
compares the paper size communicated in the print
job to the MP Tray Size setting. If different, the
printer displays a message informing you what paper
size to feed through the MP tray.
MP Tray Size
Monarch
DL
C5
The Defaults setting (page 3-60) in the System Menu
determines whether the factory setting for MP Tray
Size is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11)”.
See Figure 2.3 (page 2-6)
for more paper
dimensions.
Portrait*
Landscape
Page orientation.
Orientation
Portrait refers to a vertical page; Landscape refers to a
horizontal page.
Most software applications override this setting. If
your application does not, the printer assumes the
default setting here.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
005 - 128
Number of lines per page used in PCL.
Form Length
64* (Europe)
60* (USA)
The Form Length setting is automatically adjusted
when the Paper Size (page 3-23) default is changed.
For example, if you set Paper Size to “A4 (210x297)”
Form Length is adjusted to 64 automatically. If Paper
Size is set to “Letter (8.5X11),” Form Length is
adjusted to 60.
Most software applications override this setting. If
your application does not, the printer assumes the
default setting here.
The Defaults (page 3-60) in the System Menu
determines whether the Form Length factory setting
is 64 or 60.
3-24 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Desktop
ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L5
Collection of characters available for a font, including
uppercase and lowercase alphabets, punctuation
marks, and special characters such as open and close
quotation marks or international characters.
Symbol Set
ISO-4 UK
Most software applications override this setting. If
your application does not, the printer assumes the
default setting here.
ISO-6 ASCII
ISO-11 Swedish
ISO-15 Italian
ISO-17 Spanish
ISO-21 German
ISO-60 Norw. V1
ISO-69 French
Legal
When you change Symbol Set, the
settings for Font Number (page 3-20)
and Font Source (page 3-19) are reset to
Note
their factory settings automatically.
Math-8
Microsoft Publ.
PC-8
PC-8 DN
PC-8 Tk
PC-850
PC-852
Pi Font
PS Math
PS Text
Roman-8*
Ventura Int’l.
Ventura Math
Ventura US
Win 3.0
Win L1
Win L2
Win L5
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off*
Use to reserve memory for a full page of the selected
paper size.
Page Protection
A4 (210x297)
Legal (8.5x14)
Letter (8.5x11)
When Off, memory is not reserved for an entire page.
It then becomes possible for a page to be too complex
to compose. The result is a Page Too Complex
error message and the page may be printed on more
than one sheet of paper.
When set to a paper size, each page is composed into
reserved memory before the paper starts to move
through the printer. The printer may slow down
slightly with Page Protection; however, you will be
assured of printing a complex page on one sheet of
paper.
Page Protection can be overridden by software
when the Xerox printer driver is installed.
See Figure 2.3 (page 2-6)
for more paper
dimensions.
See “Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
for further information.
Off*
On
Determines how the printer recovers from a paper
jam. It is set independently for PCL and PostScript.
Jam Recovery
Note: The default for Jam
Recovery is On for
When On, the printer reprints any pages in the printer
at the time of the jam, after the jam has been cleared.
The printer does this by using a portion of memory to
store data. This setting can reduce printer speed with
minimum memory installed. Printer speed can be
increased by installing additional memory and/or
using the default setting of Off.
firmware release 4.0. The
default is Off (as shown at
right) for releases > 4.0. To
determine the firmware
release of your printer,
print a Configuration
Sheet.
When Off, some pages may be lost after the jam has
been cleared. The print job must be resent, specifying
those pages that did not print as a result of the paper
jam.
See “Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
for further information.
3-26 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
300x300
600x600*
Dots per inch (dpi).
Resolution
Some software applications override this setting. If
your software application does not, the printer
assumes the default setting here.
Resolution can be overridden by software when the
Xerox printer driver is installed.
Higher resolutions use more printer memory. See
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67) for
further information.
Off
On*
When On, smooths the curves in characters and
graphics to reduce coarseness, thereby improving
image quality.
TrueRes
TrueRes can be overridden by software when the
Xerox printer driver is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L M e n u
Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off*
On
Reserves memory for saving permanently downloaded
fonts and macros, when the printer switches from
using the PCL printer language to using the PostScript
printer language, or when the printer steps down in
Page Protection or Resolution.
State Saving
When Off, all permanently downloaded fonts and
macros are cleared from memory when switching
PDLs. They must be downloaded again when the
printer switches back to PCL from PostScript.
When On, permanently downloaded fonts and
macros are stored in printer memory. You eliminate
the time to download them again when the printer
switches back to PCL.
Temporary fonts and macros are always
cleared at the end of every print job.
Note
State Saving requires 10 MB (MegaBytes) of memory
if the PostScript option is installed. If the PostScript
option is not installed, State Saving may be selected
with less than 10 MB. This will prevent loss of
downloaded PCL fonts and macros if applications
change the setting of Resolution or Page
Protection. Enabling State Saving can have an
effect on printing speed with minimum memory
installed. It is recommended that this option not be
enabled without 10 MB of printer memory.
3-28 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
PostScript Menu options establish the default PostScript
configuration for the printer. PostScript may be used by
software applications to send information and instructions to
the printer.
PostScript
Menu
The 4505ps and 4510ps printers are factory-equipped with
PostScript.
PostScript is available as an option for the 4505 and 4510
printers. See Appendix D: Ordering Information.
Note
PostScript Users:
The Xerox Windows PostScript driver allows you to either
download the PostScript header with every job, or download
it only once. If the printer is used in a network or other shared
environment, where both PCL and PostScript jobs are printed,
the header will be deleted whenever the printer switches
from PostScript to PCL. Banner sheets printed from Novell
networks cause the printer to switch between PostScript and
PCL. If Banner Sheets are printed, insure that the printer’s
Language Sensing option is On. To avoid the loss of the
PostScript header, select “Download Each Job” in the
PostScript driver. The “Already Downloaded” option may be
selected in the driver if at least 10 MB of memory is installed
in the printer and the printer’s State Saving option is set to On
in the printer’s PostScript menu. You must download the
header at least once for each power on cycle. If several
different PostScript applications are used, the “Download
Each Job” option will guarantee that the correct header is
always available.
Note
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.11 (page 3-31) shows the PostScript Menu
hierarchy, which appears only when the PostScript option is
installed.
PostScript Menu
Hierarchy
3-30 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.11 PostScript Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
Menu
Language
PCL Menu
PostScript Menu
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
Copies
1* - 99
Default Tray
Standard*
Lower†
Manual
Tray Switching
Manual Size
Off*
Note: The default for
Tray Switching is
Standard-MP
MP-Standard
Standard-Lower†
Lower-Standard†
Lower-MP†
Standard-MP or
Low-Std-MP for
firmware release 4.0.
The default is Off (as
shown at right) for
releases > 4.0. To
determine the
firmware release of
your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
Legal (8.5x14)
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)*
(USA)
A4 (210x297)*
(Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
Std-Low-MP†
Low-Std-MP†
MP-Lower†
MP-Std-Low†
MP-Low-Std†
Monarch
DL
C5
Print Errors
Jam Recovery
Resolution
TrueRes
Off*
On
Off*
On
Note: The default for
Jam Recovery is On for
firmware release 4.0.
The default is Off (as
shown at right) for
releases > 4.0.
300x300
600x600*
Off
On*
State Saving
Off*
On
†Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
PostScript Menu options and their settings are described in
Figure 3.12. Factory settings are boldfaced, followed by an
asterisk (*). See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the
steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the Document
Services for Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.
PostScript Menu
Options
Default settings for certain PostScript Menu options may be
overridden from many software applications. If your software
application specifies a value for an option below, the
PostScript Menu setting will be ignored:
•
•
•
•
Copies
Default Tray
Manual Size
Tray Switching
The Xerox printer driver allows your software application to
specify additional PostScript Menu options:
•
•
Resolution
TrueRes
Note
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Copies
Setting
Description
1* - 99
Number of times each page is printed.
Most software applications override this setting. If
your application does not, the printer assumes the
default setting here.
Standard*
Lower†
Paper tray used if none is specified in your software
application.
Default Tray
Manual
†
Appears only when an
optional lower base is
installed.
3-32 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off*
Sequence of trays the printer uses when printing a
page of a PostScript print job.
Tray Switching
Standard-MP
MP-Standard
Standard-Lower†
Lower-Standard†
Lower-MP†
Note: The default for Tray
Switching is Standard-MP
or Low-Std-MP for
firmware release 4.0. The
default is Off (as shown at
right) for releases > 4.0. To
determine the firmware
release of your printer,
print a Configuration
Sheet.
If the tray requested for the page is included in this
sequence, then the whole sequence is used instead of
the requested tray. The first tray used is the one in the
sequence, going from left to right, that satisfies all
page requirements. If the requested tray is not
included in this sequence, then the requested tray
alone is used. For example, if this setting is
“Lower-Standard” and the standard tray (upper) is
requested, then the lower tray will be used first
provided that it contains the requested size of paper.
Std-Low-MP†
Low-Std-MP†
MP-Lower†
MP-Std-Low†
MP-Low-Std†
When this sequence is being used and the current tray
runs out of paper, then the next tray in the sequence
that has the same size paper will be used.
Settings that include the lower tray only appear in the
menu when an optional lower base is installed.
Settings that begin with MP allow for printing of the
first pages of a job on special stock by placing the
required number of sheets of the special stock in the
MP tray.
The factory default is Low-Std-MP when a lower tray
is installed, or Standard-MP when a lower tray is not
installed.
†
Appears only when an
optional lower base is
installed.
Do not remove either the standard or
lower tray when the printer is feeding
paper.
!
Caution
PostScript drivers other than the Xerox driver may
simply enable or disable Tray Switching; they can
not specify a setting.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Legal (8.5x14)
Paper size to expect in the manual slot if none is
specified in your software application.
Manual Size
Folio (8.5x13)
Letter (8.5x11)* (USA)
A4 (210x297)* (Europe)
Exec (7.25x10.5)
B5 (176x250)
A5 (148.5x210)
Com-10
Monarch
DL
C5
Manual Size communicates the paper size feeding
through the MP tray. The MP tray does not have a size
sensor; therefore, you must explicitly tell the printer
what MP tray paper size to expect. The printer
compares the paper size communicated in the print
job to the Manual Size setting. If different, the
printer displays a message informing you what paper
size to feed through the MP tray.
The Defaults option (page 3-60) in the System Menu
determines whether the factory setting for Manual
Size is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11).”
The Xerox Windows PostScript driver allows you to
select either “MP Tray” or Manual Feed” to designate
the printer’s MP tray as the paper source. If “MP Tray”
is selected from the driver, the setting of Manual Size
on the printer Control Panel must match the paper
size requested in the driver. If Manual Size and the
selection of the paper size in the driver do not match,
the page may be formatted incorrectly. You can
change the setting of Manual Size in the PostScript
Menu after the Control Panel prompts you to load the
appropriate paper in the MP tray. The setting of
Manual Size on the Control Panel only affects paper
fed from the MP tray. This setting is ignored for paper
fed from the standard or lower trays.
Off*
On
Control of PostScript’s built-in error handler
(debugger).
Print Errors
Should the printer encounter a PostScript error while
printing a job, PostScript prints an error sheet when
Print Errors is On. This is useful on a network, as an
error sheet will alert the user that the print job had
errors and was flushed.
3-34 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off*
On
Determines how the printer recovers from a paper
jam. It is set independently for PCL and PostScript.
Jam Recovery
Note: The default for Jam
Recovery is On for
When On, the printer reprints any pages in the printer
at the time of the jam, after the jam has been cleared.
The printer does this by using a portion of memory to
store data. This setting can reduce printer speed with
minimum memory installed. Printer speed can be
increased by installing additional memory and/or
using the default setting of Off.
firmware release 4.0. The
default is Off (as shown at
right) for releases > 4.0. To
determine the firmware
release of your printer,
print a Configuration
Sheet.
When Off, some pages may be lost after the jam has
been cleared. The print job must be resent, specifying
those pages that did not print as a result of the paper
jam.
See “Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)
for further information.
300x300
600x600*
Dots per inch (dpi).
Resolution
Some software applications override this setting. If
your software application does not, the printer
assumes the default setting here.
Resolution can be overridden by software when the
Xerox printer driver is installed.
Higher resolutions require more printer memory. See
“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67) for
further information.
Off
On*
When On, smooths the curves in characters and
graphics to reduce coarseness, thereby improving
image quality.
TrueRes
TrueRes can be overridden by software when the
Xerox printer driver is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P o s t S c r i p t M e n u
Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off*
On
Reserves memory for saving the contents of virtual
memory, when print jobs switch from PostScript to
the PCL printer language or when the printer steps
down in Page Protection or Resolution.
State Saving
When Off, if print jobs switch from PostScript to PCL,
the contents of virtual memory are cleared.†
When On, State Saving saves virtual memory
contents, eliminating the time to download again
when switching back to PostScript.
State Saving requires 10 MB (MegaBytes) of memory
if the PostScript option is installed. If the PostScript
option is not installed, State Saving may be selected
with less than 10 MB. This will prevent loss of
downloaded PCL fonts and macros if applications
change the setting of Resolution or Page
Protection. Enabling State Saving can have an
effect on printing speed with minimum memory
installed. It is recommended that this option not be
enabled without 10 MB of printer memory.
The contents of virtual memory will not
be saved if there is not enough free
memory.
Note
†
In Microsoft Windows, the PostScript printer driver has an
option for determining whether header information
(general instructions PostScript needs before processing a
print job) is sent with every print job or just once at the
start of a PostScript session. The header is stored in virtual
memory. If you set the header option to send it to the
printer once, turning State Saving On means the header
will not need to be sent again upon return to PostScript
operation.
3-36 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
The Interface Menu contains submenus for the parallel and
serial ports on the printer as well as submenus for network
interface ports when a network option(s) is installed.
Interface
Menu
The Interface Menu may include submenus for the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Parallel Menu (See page 3-41.)
Serial Menu (See page 3-45.)
LocalTalk Menu (See page 3-50.)
Ethernet Menu (See page 3-51.)
Token Ring Menu (See page 3-54.)
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38) shows the Interface Menu hierarchy.
Interface Menu
Hierarchy
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.13 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
Menu
Language
PCL Menu
PostScript Menu†
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
Parallel Menu
Port Enable
Off
On*
Port Timeout
5 - 999 secs (30*)
System Language
PCL*
PostScript†
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Bidirectional
Transfer Rate
Off
On*
Off
On*
Off*
On
High
Low*
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
3-38 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.13 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings (continued)
Port Enable
Off
On*
Serial Menu
Port Timeout
5 - 999 secs (30*)
System Language
PCL*
PostScript†
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Port Type
Off
On*
Off
On*
RS232*
RS422
Baud Rate
57600
38400
19200
9600*
4800
2400
1200
600
300
Handshake
Robust XON*
XON
Hardware
DTR Polarity
Data Bits
Parity
High*
Low
7
8*
None*
Even
Odd
Stop Bits
2
1.5
1*
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.13 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings (continued)
LocalTalk Menu‡
Ethernet Menu‡
Port Timeout
5 - 999 secs (30*)
5 - 999 secs (30*)
Port Timeout
System Language
PCL*
PostScript†
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Frame Type
Off
On*
Note: The Frame Type
option (as shown at
right) is available for
firmware release 4.0
only. To determine the
firmware release of
your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
Off
On*
802.3*
Ethernet II
Token Ring Menu‡
Port Timeout
5 - 999 secs (30*)
System Language
PCL*
PostScript†
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Off
On*
Off
On*
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
‡ Appears only when the option is installed.
3-40 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
The Parallel Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,
Parallel Menu
Options
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38), contains options for configuring the
printer’s bidirectional parallel port.
Figure 3.14 describes each Parallel Menu option. Factory
settings are boldfaced and followed by an asterisk (*). See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps to find and
change a setting, or refer to the Document Services for
Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.
Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Setting
Description
Off
On*
Activation of the parallel port.
Port Enable
When On, the parallel port is enabled so that the
printer can receive print jobs through it.
The parallel port becomes part of a port polling
sequence that includes all enabled ports. See
Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for information.
When Off, the port is disabled so no communication
occurs through this port with the host. If you are not
using the parallel port, you can set Port Enable Off.
5-999 secs (30*)
Time interval for determining when to end an
incomplete print job and poll the next port in the
polling sequence.
Port Timeout
Port Timeout works in conjunction with Auto Job
End (page 3-43).
See Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for more
information.
PCL*
Page description language (PDL) the printer will use
for print jobs coming through the parallel port.
System Language
PostScript†
†
Appears only when the
PostScript option is
installed.
When Lang. Sensing (page 3-42) is On, System
Language is used only when the printer cannot
detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off
On*
Automatic recognition of the page description
language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.
Lang. Sensing
When On, if the parallel port receives print jobs of
different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed
by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which
PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the
incoming data stream, then switching to the
perceived language for that job or to the System
Language setting if it fails to sense the language.
When On, if State Saving (page 3-28) in the PCL
Menu or State Saving (page 3-36) in the PostScript
Menu is also On, the permanently downloaded fonts
and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time
to download them again when switching between
PDLs occurs.
3-42 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off
On*
Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.
Auto Job End
When On, after the current print job has paused long
enough to exceed the Port Timeout (page 3-41)
interval and no data has been received on any other
port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is
ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared
from memory.
Use Auto Job End On when the printer serves
multiple users on a network. This assures that one
user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the
printer whether or not another user sends a print job.
No partial pages will be left unprinted.
When Off, the print job does not end after the
timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue
until another print job is received on any port. A
partial page will remain unprinted until the next print
job is received. See Form Feed
(page 3-6) for
information on ejecting partial pages.
Auto Job End should be On if the printer
is on a network.
Note
If you are not sharing the printer with other users and
if you find that one page is split and printed on
multiple pages, set Auto Job End Off or increase the
Port Timeout interval. It could be the Port Timeout
is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.
Also see “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”
(page 3-67) for other ways to correct the problem of
one page printing on multiple pages.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off*
On
Activation of two-way communications between the
printer and your computer.
Bidirectional
Bidirectional On enables the printer to send
messages to your computer.
Only set Bidirectional On if you have a
software application that supports it.
!
Caution
High
Low*
Relative speed of the port.
Transfer Rate
The High setting will free up the host more quickly for
other processing. If your computer cannot handle the
high speed, data may be lost.
3-44 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
The Serial Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,
Serial Menu
Options
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38), contains options for configuring the
printer’s serial port.
Figure 3.15 describes each Serial Menu option. Factory
settings are boldfaced and followed by an asterisk (*). See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps to find and
change a setting, or refer to the Document Services for
Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Setting
Description
Off
On*
Activation of the serial port.
Port Enable
When On, the serial port is enabled so that the printer
can receive print jobs through it.
The serial port becomes part of a port polling
sequence that includes all enabled ports. See
Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for information.
When Off, the port is disabled so no communication
occurs through this port with the host. If you are not
using the serial port, you can set Port Enable Off.
5-999 secs (30*)
Time interval for determining when to end an
incomplete print job and poll the next port in the
polling sequence.
Port Timeout
Port Timeout works in conjunction with Auto Job
End (page 3-47).
See Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for more
information.
PCL*
Page description language (PDL) the printer will use
for print jobs coming through the serial port.
System Language
PostScript†
†
Appears only when the
PostScript option is
installed.
When Lang. Sensing (page 3-46) is On, System
Language is used only when the printer cannot
detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off
On*
Automatic recognition of the page description
language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.
Lang. Sensing
When On, if the serial port receives print jobs of
different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed
by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which
PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the
incoming data stream, then switching to the
perceived language for that job or to the System
Language setting if it fails to sense the language.
When On, if State Saving (page 3-28) in the PCL
Menu or State Saving (page 3-36) in the PostScript
Menu is also On, the permanently downloaded fonts
and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time
to download them again when switching between
PDLs occurs.
3-46 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off
On*
Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.
Auto Job End
When On, after the current print job has paused long
enough to exceed the Port Timeout (page 3-45)
interval and no data has been received on any other
port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is
ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared
from memory.
Use Auto Job End On when the printer serves
multiple users on a network. This assures that one
user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the
printer whether or not another user sends a print job.
No partial pages will be left unprinted.
When Off, the print job does not end after the
timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue
until another print job is received on any port. A
partial page will remain unprinted until the next print
job is received. See Form Feed
(page 3-6) for
information on ejecting partial pages.
Auto Job End should be On if the printer
is on a network.
Note
If you are not sharing the printer with other users and
if you find that one page is split and printed on
multiple pages, set Auto Job End Off or increase the
Port Timeout interval. It could be the Port Timeout
is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.
Also see “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”
(page 3-67) for other ways to correct the problem of
one page printing on multiple pages.
RS232*
RS422
Serial interface standard.
Port Type
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
57600
38400
19200
9600*
4800
2400
1200
600
Speed at which data is transferred.
Baud Rate
Baud rate translates approximately to bits per
second.
The serial port Baud Rate setting must
match the host computer baud rate
setting.
Note
300
Your software application may set the
baud rate. If not, use the DOS MODE
command to modify the baud rate on
the host computer. Refer to your DOS
documentation for more information.
Robust XON*
XON
Hardware
Data flow control. (Flow control, also known as
handshaking, is the cooperation between the host
computer and printer for data transfer. XON signals
the host computer to send more data. XOFF is the
converse signal that tells the host computer to stop
and wait.)
Handshake
Robust XON sends the XON signal continuously.
Robust XON helps ensure that handshaking works
with a host computer that fails to receive the XON
signal.
XON sends the signal only once.
Hardware is used when the host computer cannot
operate in XON/XOFF handshaking mode. Hardware
requires a cable with the DTR (Data Terminal
Ready) pin connection enabled.
High*
Low
Serial port’s DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal sent
from the printer to notify the host computer that it is
ready to receive data.
DTR Polarity
High is standard for most computers; it uses true logic
(+5 V).
Low is typically used on nonstandard equipment; it
uses inverted logic (0 V).
3-48 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
7
8*
Number of data bits in a character.
Data Bits
The Data Bits setting must match the
host computer data bits setting.
Note
None*
Even
Odd
How the parity bit is used in error checking.
Parity
The parity bit may be checked against the received
character by means of an Even or Odd error checking
mechanism.
The Parity setting must match the host
computer parity setting.
Note
2
1.5
1*
Number of stop bits in each character. (Stop bits
signal the end of a character.)
Stop Bits
The Stop Bits setting must match the
host computer stop bits setting.
Note
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
The LocalTalk Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38), contains a single option for
configuring the printer’s LocalTalk port, when the LocalTalk
option has been installed.
LocalTalk Menu
Option
The LocalTalk option supports AppleTalk protocols. For
detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to
Networking: LocalTalk packaged with the LocalTalk option.
Figure 3.16 describes the option. The factory setting is
boldfaced and followed by an asterisk (*). See “Setting a
Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps to find and change
the setting.
Figure 3.16 LocalTalk Menu option showing factory setting
Option
Setting
Description
5-999 secs (30*)
Time interval for determining when to poll the next
port in the polling sequence, after the LocalTalk port
has been inactive for this amount of time.
Port Timeout
3-50 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
The Ethernet Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,
Ethernet Menu
Options
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38), contains options for configuring the
printer’s Ethernet port, when the Ethernet option has been
installed.
The Ethernet option supports the following protocols:
•
•
•
•
•
Novell NetWare, Version 3.11
TCP/IP
EtherTalk
DEC LAT
Microsoft LAN Manager
For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to
Networking: Ethernet packaged with the Ethernet option kit.
Figure 3.17 describes each Ethernet Menu option. Factory
settings are boldfaced and followed by an asterisk (*). See
“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps to find and
change a setting, or refer to the Document Services for
Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.
Figure 3.17 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Setting
Description
5-999 secs (30*)
Time interval for determining when to end an
incomplete print job and poll the next port in the
polling sequence.
Port Timeout
Port Timeout works in conjunction with Auto Job
End (page 3-53).
See Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for more information
on how port polling works.
PCL*
Page description language (PDL) the printer will use
for print jobs coming through the Ethernet port.
System Language
PostScript†
†
Appears only when the
PostScript option is
installed.
When Lang. Sensing (page 3-52) is On, System
Language is used only when the printer cannot
detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.17 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off
On*
Automatic recognition of the page description
language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.
Lang. Sensing
When On, if the Ethernet port receives print jobs of
different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed
by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which
PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the
incoming data stream, then switching to the
perceived language for that job or to the System
Language setting if it fails to sense the language.
When On, if State Saving (page 3-28) in the PCL
Menu or State Saving (page 3-36) in the PostScript
Menu is also On, the permanently downloaded fonts
and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time
to download them again when switching between
PDLs occurs.
3-52 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.17 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off
On*
Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.
Auto Job End
When On, after the current print job has paused long
enough to exceed the Port Timeout (page 3-51)
interval and no data has been received on any other
port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is
ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared
from memory.
Use Auto Job End On when the printer serves
multiple users on a network. This assures that one
user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the
printer whether or not another user sends a print job.
No partial pages will be left unprinted.
When Off, the print job does not end after the
timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue
until another print job is received on any port. A
partial page will remain unprinted until the next print
job is received. See Form Feed
(page 3-6) for
information on ejecting partial pages.
Auto Job End should be On if the printer
is on a network.
Note
If you are not sharing the printer with other users and
if you find that one page is split and printed on
multiple pages, set Auto Job End Off or increase the
Port Timeout interval. It could be the Port Timeout
is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.
Also see “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”
(page 3-67) for other ways to correct the problem of
one page printing on multiple pages.
802.3*
Ethernet II
Protocol standard frame type.
Frame Type
Refer to your network software documentation for
the correct frame type.
Note: This option is
available for firmware
release 4.0 only. To
determine the firmware
release of your printer,
print a Configuration
Sheet.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
The Token Ring Menu, a submenu of the Interface Menu,
Figure 3.13 (page 3-38), contains options for configuring the
printer’s Token Ring port, when the Token Ring option has
been installed.
Token Ring
Menu Options
The Token Ring option supports the following protocols:
•
•
Novell NetWare, Version 3.11
Microsoft LAN Manager
For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to
Networking: Token Ring packaged with the Token Ring
option kit.
Figure 3.18 (page 3-55) describes each Token Ring Menu
option. Factory settings are boldfaced and followed by an
asterisk (*). See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the
steps to find and change a setting.
3-54 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.18 Token Ring Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Setting
Description
5-999 secs (30*)
Time interval for determining when to end an
incomplete print job and poll the next port in the
polling sequence.
Port Timeout
Port Timeout works in conjunction with Auto Job
End (page 3-56).
See Appendix C: I/O Port Polling for more information
on how port polling works.
PCL*
Page description language (PDL) the printer will use
for print jobs coming through the Token Ring port.
System Language
Lang. Sensing
PostScript†
†
Appears only when the
PostScript option is
installed.
When Lang. Sensing (page 3-55) is On, System
Language is used only when the printer cannot
detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.
Off
On*
Automatic recognition of the page description
language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.
When On, if the Token Ring port receives print jobs of
different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed
by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which
PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the
incoming data stream, then switching to the
perceived language for that job or to the System
Language setting if it fails to sense the language.
When On, if State Saving (page 3-28) in the PCL
Menu or State Saving (page 3-36) in the PostScript
Menu is also On, the permanently downloaded fonts
and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time
to download them again when switching between
PDLs occurs.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n t e r f a c e M e n u
Figure 3.18 Token Ring Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off
On*
Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.
Auto Job End
When On, after the current print job has paused long
enough to exceed the Port Timeout (page 3-55)
interval and no data has been received on any other
port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is
ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared
from memory.
Use Auto Job End On when the printer serves
multiple users on a network. This assures that one
user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the
printer whether or not another user sends a print job.
No partial pages will be left unprinted.
When Off, the print job does not end after the
timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue
until another print job is received on any port. A
partial page will remain unprinted until the next print
job is received. See Form Feed
(page 3-6) for
information on ejecting partial pages.
Auto Job End should be On if the printer
is on a network.
Note
If you are not sharing the printer with other users and
if you find that one page is split and printed on
multiple pages, set Auto Job End Off or increase the
Port Timeout interval. It could be the Port Timeout
is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.
Also see “Printer Settings that Affect Memory”
(page 3-67) for other ways to correct the problem of
one page printing on multiple pages.
3-56 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S y s t e m M e n u
The System Menu options set general printer features.
System Menu
Figure 3.19 highlights the System Menu hierarchy.
System Menu
Hierarchy
Figure 3.19 System Menu hierarchy showing factory settings
Language
PCL Menu
Menu
PostScript Menu†
Interface Menu
System Menu
Test Menu
Hex Dump
Chime
Off*
On
Off
Once*
Continuous
System Messages
Auto Continue
Off
On*
Note: The System
Messages and Print
Density options (as
shown at right) are
available for firmware
release 4.0 only.
Off*
On
The Power Saver
option (as shown at
right) is available for
firmware releases > 4.0.
Print Density
Defaults
0 - 4 (2*)
Europe
USA
To determine the
firmware release of
your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
Power Saver
15 min.* (4505)
30 min.* (4510)
60 min.
90 min.
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S y s t e m M e n u
In Figure 3.20, System Menu options and their settings are
described. Factory settings are boldfaced, followed by an
asterisk (*). See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the
steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the Document
Services for Printing Guide to use the RUI to change settings.
System Menu
Options
Figure 3.20 System Menu options showing factory settings
Option
Setting
Description
Off*
On
Print output as hexadecimal codes instead of normal
print data.
Hex Dump
When Off, data is printed normally.
When On, Hex Dump is used for error checking and
error analysis.
When Hex Dump is On, the Control Panel
menus are not available.
Note
Off
Once*
Continuous
Audible chime signal for attention.
Chime
When Once, the printer sounds one audible chime
when needing attention.
When Continuous, the printer sounds frequent
audible chimes when needing attention.
When Off, no chime sound is produced.
Off
On*
Display of system error messages.
System Messages
When On, system error messages are displayed.
When Off, no system messages are displayed.
Note: This option is
available for firmware
release 4.0 only. To
determine the firmware
release of your printer,
print a Configuration
Sheet.
3-58 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S y s t e m M e n u
Figure 3.20 System Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Off*
On
Control of the resumption of printing after system
errors occur.
Auto Continue
Certain errors may occur that halt printer operations.
Two examples are:
Out of Memory
and
Page Too Complex.
When Auto Continue is Off, the printer does not
automatically resume. Enter
must be pressed
before normal printer operations can continue.
When Auto Continue is On, the printer automatically
resumes operation after certain system errors if
Enter
is not pressed within ten seconds. The
On setting is useful in a networked environment.
0 - 4 (2*)
Darkness of the print.
Print Density
0 is the lightest and 4 is the darkest.
Note: This option is
available for firmware
release 4.0 only. To
determine the firmware
release of your printer,
print a Configuration
Sheet.
A darker print density uses more toner and may
reduce the life of the EP cartridge.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S y s t e m M e n u
Figure 3.20 System Menu options showing factory settings (continued)
Option
Setting
Description
Europe
USA
Control of default paper size settings in various
menus.
Defaults
There is no standard factory-set default for this
option; the default varies by world region.
When Europe, all paper size-related options are set to
A4 (210x297) and Form Length is set to 64.
When USA, all paper size-related options are set to
Letter (8.5x11) and Form Length is set to 60.
The Config. Sheet (page 3-62) is printed at Defaults
size, regardless of actual paper size.
Perform a Reset Menus (page 3-66) after
changing Defaults.
Note
15 min.* (4505)
30 min.* (4510)
60 min.
The Xerox 4505/4510 printers conform to EPA Energy
Star guidelines. The printer will enter a low power
state after 15 minutes of inactivity on the 4505 and
after 30 minutes of inactivity on the 4510. This
timeout is adjustable to 15, 30, 60 or 90 minutes via
this option.
Power Saver
Note: This option is
available for firmware
releases > 4.0 only. To
determine the firmware
release of your printer,
print a Configuration
Sheet.
90 min.
When in the low power state, the printer displays
Power Saver Mode on the Control Panel. When a
print job is received while in the power saver mode,
the printer may require up to 30 seconds of warm up
time before the first sheet is fed from the input tray.
3-60 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T e s t M e n u
Test Menu options are functions that provide output to help
Test Menu
you maintain high quality printing.
Options in the Test Menu are functions to be performed by
the printer rather than settings. There are no submenus.
Note
Figure 3.21 shows the Test Menu hierarchy.
Test Menu
Hierarchy
Figure 3.21 Test Menu hierarchy
Language
PCL Menu
Menu
PostScript Menu†
Interface Menu
System Menu
Note: The Demo Page
option (as shown at
right) is available for
firmware releases > 4.0
only. To determine the
firmware release of
your printer, print a
Configuration Sheet.
Test Menu
Config. Sheet
Demo Page
PCL Font List
PS Font List†
Test Print
Memory Check
Fuser Cleaning
† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T e s t M e n u
Figure 3.22 describes each Test Menu function. See “Setting
a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps in performing a Test
Menu function.
Test Menu
Functions
Figure 3.22 Test Menu functions
Function
Description
Configuration Sheet to show the printer’s current information and menu settings.
The Configuration Sheet contains a variety of information such as:
Config. Sheet
• Number of sheets printed to date.
• Total printer memory (RAM) available.
• Firmware versions for the printer controller.
• Firmware versions for Ethernet, LocalTalk, and Token Ring, when installed.
• PostScript revision level, when installed.
• Current menu settings.
• Information on installed options, including the lower base.
The Configuration Sheet is printed from the Default Source (page 3-21) at the
current Resolution setting (page 3-27), both specified in the PCL Menu, using A4
(210x297) paper if the System Menu setting for Defaults (page 3-60) is Europe, or
using Letter (8.5x11) paper if Defaults is USA.
Config. Sheet will cause a printer reset.
Demo Page listing Connectivity, Paper Handling, Print Quality and Page Description
Languages of the printer.
Demo Page
Note: This option is
available for firmware
releases > 4.0 only. To
determine the firmware
release of your printer,
print a Configuration
Sheet.
The Demo Page is printed from the Default Source (page 3-21), specified in the
PCL Menu, at 600 dpi using A4 (210x297) paper if the System Menu setting for
Defaults (page 3-60) is Europe, or using Letter (8.5x11) paper if Defaults is USA.
Demo Page will cause a printer reset.
3-62 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T e s t M e n u
Figure 3.22 Test Menu functions (continued)
Function
Description
Complete list of all PCL fonts currently available in the printer.
PCL Font List
PCL fonts include those that are internal, on font card(s), and permanently
downloaded soft fonts. See Font Source (page 3-19) for font storage locations.
The PCL Font List prints font number, typeface name, whether the font is fixed
pitch or proportionally spaced, point size or scalable indication, orientation, other
font characteristics, and a font sample.
Printing a PCL Font List will cause a printer reset, ejecting any partial pages and
clearing any incomplete jobs, temporary fonts, and macros from memory.
The Font Number (page 3-20) may change based on what fonts you
have loaded and what Symbol Set (page 3-25) you are using.
Note
Complete list of the 35 PostScript language typefaces.
PS Font List
Test Print
With PostScript installed, the PS Font List shows all resident PostScript fonts
available in the printer, as well as a sample of each. Downloaded PostScript fonts
are not shown.
“Test pattern” for analysis of print quality over the entire page; intended for use by
service technicians.
The number of Test Prints produced is determined by Copies (page 3-19) and
printed from the Default Source (page 3-21), both specified in the PCL Menu,
using the paper size set in Paper Size (page 3-23).
Test Print will cause a printer reset, clearing any incomplete jobs.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T e s t M e n u
Figure 3.22 Test Menu functions (continued)
Function
Description
Complete check of printer memory (resident and any SIMMs installed) and a
reporting of the results on the Control Panel display.
Memory Check
Memory Check is more extensive than the check performed when the printer is
powered on. When you invoke Memory Check, you will see:
Memory Check
Please Wait....
Before Memory Check, any partial pages are ejected and any incomplete print
jobs, permanently downloaded fonts, and macros are cleared from memory. After
Memory Check is finished, it reboots the printer to its power-on state.
If a problem occurs, the Control Panel will display a numeric diagnostic code. See
“Displayed Control Panel Messages” (page 7-5) to locate the diagnostic message
associated with the numeric code.
Invokes the fuser cleaning cycle, which is recommended each time the EP cartridge
is replaced.
Fuser Cleaning
See “Fuser Cleaning Cycle” (page 6-9) for complete instructions on performing the
fuser cleaning operation. When fuser cleaning is finished, the printer will be reset,
clearing any incomplete print jobs.
3-64 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R e s e t M e n u
The Reset Menu offers several functions to reset various
Reset Menu
printer functions.
Options in the Reset Menu are functions to be performed by
the printer rather than settings. There are no submenus.
Note
Figure 3.23 shows the Reset Menu hierarchy.
Reset Menu
Hierarchy
Figure 3.23 Reset Menu hierarchy
Note: The Reset I/f Cards
option (as shown at right) is
available for firmware
release 4.0 only.
Reset Printer
†
Appears only when an optional
Reset Menus
network card is installed.
Reset I/f Cards†
Reset
‡
Reset All
Appears only when the
Cancel PS Job‡
PostScript option is installed.
To determine the firmware
release of your printer, print
a Configuration Sheet.
Figure 3.24 (page 3-66) describes each Reset Menu function.
See “Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10) for the steps in
performing a Reset Menu function.
Reset Menu
Functions
For all types of reset (except Reset I/F/Cards for firmware
release 4.0), the printer clears any temporarily downloaded
fonts and print macros from memory, as well as ejects any
partially printed pages.
Note
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R e s e t M e n u
Figure 3.24 Reset Menu options
Option
Description
Reset of the printer’s PCL and PostScript printer languages to their power-on state.
Reset Printer
Reset Printer is useful when you have printing problems. First, cancel the print job
from the host. Second, invoke Reset Printer.
Reset Printer cancels any print jobs being processed and clears all temporary
fonts and macros.
Reset Printer does not change the menu settings of any network
option. However, any current print jobs being processed by a
network option will be discarded.
Note
Reset of menus to their factory settings.
Reset Menus
Reset Menus does not affect the Language setting (page 3-14), the System
Menu Defaults setting (page 3-60), or the System Menu Print Density setting
(page 3-59).
The printer remains offline, so you can work with other menus.
Reset of network interface card(s) to their power-on state.
Reset I/f Cards
Note: This option is
available for firmware
release 4.0 only. To
determine the firmware
release of your printer,
print a Configuration
Sheet.
Reset I/f Cards appears only if a network card is installed.
Use this type of reset if one or more of the network interfaces is not
communicating properly.
All reset functions are performed:
Reset All
• Reset Printer
• Reset Menus
• Reset I/f Cards
Cancellation of the current PostScript job.
Cancel PS Job
This function appears only if PostScript is installed.
The PostScript job is flushed from memory—the entire print job is discarded.
Cancel PS Job is useful when a fault in your software application causes a
PostScript error. For example, a PostScript programming error could cause an
infinite loop which Cancel PS Job would exit.
3-66 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y
Certain PCL Menu and PostScript Menu options affect the
printer’s performance and memory usage, as described in
“PCL Menu” (page 3-15) and “PostScript Menu” (page 3-29).
Printer
Settings that
Affect
Figure 3.25 provides more detailed information on these
options.
Memory
Figure 3.25 PCL and PostScript Menu options that affect printing speed and memory usage
Option
Description
When a page is particularly complex with graphics or dense text, the printer
may not be able to process it rapidly enough to keep up with normal
printing operations. Data may be lost or one page may be split on multiple
pages.
Page Protection
PCL Menu (page 3-26)
Page protection is a technique that reserves memory to ensure the entire
page can be created and printed before the actual printing process. The
trade-off in performance is matched by the certainty that an entire complex
page may be printed.
Page Protection is related to Resolution (page 3-27 for PCL, page 3-35
for PostScript, and page 3-68) since the amount of memory needed for a
page depends on its resolution. The higher the resolution, the more
memory needed. See Figure 3.26 (page 3-69) for memory requirements.
Your software application may change the Page Protection level (e.g.,
from Legal to Letter). When that occurs, the printer’s memory is
reconfigured. Downloaded fonts and macros may be cleared from memory
unless State Saving (page 3-28 for PCL, page 3-36 for PostScript, and
page 3-68) is set.
If any request for memory cannot be satisfied, you will be notified on the
Control Panel.
If you frequently see the following error message
Page Too Complex
you may want to set Page Protection to be able to print the entire page.
Otherwise, if you do not see frequent warning messages, set Page
Protection Off.
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y
Figure 3.25 PCL and PostScript Menu options that affect printing speed and memory usage
Option
Description
A paper jam may cause a page image being printed to become lost. When
Jam Recovery is On, the printer will automatically reprint the image of the
jammed page, after the jam has been cleared.
Jam Recovery
PCL Menu (page 3-26)
PostScript Menu (page 3-35)
Because the printer holds a page image in memory longer with Jam
Recovery, if a low memory condition occurs there can be a slight
performance impact and the printer may require more memory. If sufficient
memory exists, Jam Recovery has no impact.
The printer prints at 600 or 300 dpi. The factory setting is 600 dpi.
Resolution
Your software application may be able to set Resolution and override the
setting here. Whether a new Resolution is set by your application or on
the Control Panel, the new Resolution becomes effective with the next
print job or with a printer reset. Unless State Saving (page 3-28 for PCL,
page 3-36 for PostScript, and page 3-68) is On, downloaded fonts and
macros may be cleared from memory.
PCL Menu (page 3-27)
PostScript Menu (page 3-35)
The higher the resolution, the more memory required. See Figure 3.26
(page 3-69) for memory requirements.
When State Saving is Off, fonts and printer macros permanently
downloaded from your software application are cleared from memory
when:
State Saving
PCL Menu (page 3-28)
PostScript Menu (page 3-36)
• The printer switches from one page description language (PDL) to
another (such as from PostScript to PCL).
• A memory reconfiguration takes place (such as for a new Page
Protection or Resolution setting).
When State Saving is On, the printer reserves memory to retain the
downloaded fonts and macros. Thus, the fonts and macros do not have to
be downloaded to memory again when switching PDLs or reconfiguring
memory.
You may set State Saving separately for the PCL and the PostScript
environments.
The printer requires 10 MB of memory to enable State Saving when
PostScript is installed. If PostScript is not installed, State Saving may be
enabled with 6 MB of memory.
3-68 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y
The memory requirements shown in Figure 3.26 provide for
optimal memory usage and printer performance.
Minimum Memory
Requirements
If you encounter memory warning messages, try different
combinations of Resolution and Page Protection before
purchasing additional memory.
Note
Figure 3.26 Minimum memory requirements
Setting
300 dpi
600 dpi
PCL
2 MB
2 MB
with Page Protection Off
PCL
2 MB
6 MB
with Page Protection set
PostScript (and PCL)
6 MB
6 MB
PostScript and/or PCL
10 MB
10 MB
with State Saving On
Install a 4 MB or 16 MB SIMM to increase printer memory
capacity. See Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options for the
SIMM installation procedure.
Note
C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l
❖
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-70 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Using Fonts
4
retpahC
Overview ............................................................................... 4-3
Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts 4-3
Where Fonts Reside 4-4
Fonts Resident on the Printer .............................................. 4-5
TrueType Fonts 4-6
Intellifont Fonts 4-7
PCL Bitmap Font 4-8
Adding Fonts ......................................................................... 4-9
PostScript 4-9
Font Cards 4-10
Fonts within Software Applications 4-11
Selecting a Font .................................................................. 4-12
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downloading Fonts ............................................................ 4-13
Temporary and Permanent Fonts 4-13
4-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
A font is a collection of characters of one typeface, one
Overview
weight, and one posture. An example is Courier New Italic. A
font generally contains uppercase and lowercase alphabets,
numbers, and special characters such as punctuation marks.
A font family is composed of one typeface in all its available
weights and postures. Courier New, for example, has
medium, italic, bold, and bold italic.
Fonts are normally categorized according to the manner in
which they are generated:
Bitmapped and
Scalable Fonts
•
Bitmapped font
A bitmapped font contains digitized images of each
character in the font. Each symbol (that is, character,
number, or punctuation mark) is a complete image in
digitized form.
Each symbol is stored as a bitmap (or raster) that
represents the black or white parts of the symbol. The
bitmaps are copied onto the paper when printing takes
place.
•
Scalable font
A scalable font contains characters described by
mathematical formulae that produce character outlines.
A mathematical formula describes a line between two
points which constitutes one line of the character’s
outline. The images printed on paper are digitized as the
page is being printed. During digitization, the image may
be scaled, sloped, or rotated.
There exists a variety of mathematical models used to
construct scalable fonts, but the two most popular are
Bézier and B-spline.
Scalable fonts are also known as contour or outline fonts.
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
At one time, computers used bitmapped fonts only. One set of
bitmapped fonts was needed to display characters on a
terminal screen, and another set was needed for printing.
These were called screen fonts and printer fonts,
respectively.
Today, software applications use many scalable fonts because
they can be used for both screen and printer.
Where Fonts Screen fonts are always stored on the host computer, not the
printer.
Reside
Printer fonts may reside in three places:
•
•
•
Printer ROM holds resident fonts, installed at the factory
on memory chips on the printer controller board. See
“Fonts Resident on the Printer” (page 4-5) for a complete
list.
A font card inserted into the printer holds additional PCL
fonts. The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers provide
two slots for font cards. See Chapter 1: Introduction
(page 1-3) for font card location.
Software applications contain additional fonts that may
be downloaded to printer memory, in some cases, for the
entire time the printer is turned on. See “Downloading
Fonts” (page 4-13) for more information.
4-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are equipped
with resident fonts installed at the factory on memory chips
on the printer controller board.
Fonts
Resident on
the Printer
Resident fonts are used by software applications that
communicate with the printer in PCL (Printer Command
Language). See Appendix B: Printer Commands (Escape
Sequences) for more information on all PCL commands.
The 4505ps and 4510ps printers are factory equipped with the
PostScript option that makes available 35 PostScript fonts. To
review the PostScript fonts, print a PS Font List (page 3-63).
Also, refer to your PostScript reference documentation.
Note
Resident fonts available to PCL include the following:
•
•
•
10 TrueType fonts. See “TrueType Fonts” (page 4-6).
35 Intellifont fonts. See “Intellifont Fonts” (page 4-7).
1 PCL Bitmap font. See “PCL Bitmap Font” (page 4-8).
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r
TrueType fonts are used by Microsoft Windows 3.1 or later
TrueType
Fonts
and may be printed to PostScript and non-PostScript printers.
The ten resident TrueType fonts on the 4505/4505ps and
4510/4510ps printers are:
Arial
Arial Bold
Arial Bold Italic
Arial Italic
Symbol
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Times New Roman Italic
Wingdings
4-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r
Intellifont is a scalable font format. The printers are fully
compatible with this font format and provide these 35
resident Intellifont fonts:
Intellifont
Fonts
Antique Olive Medium
Antique Olive Italic
Antique Olive Bold
Albertus Medium
Albertus Extra Bold
CG Omega Medium
CG Omega Italic
CG Omega Bold
Garamond Antiqua
Garamond Kursiv
Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Letter Gothic Medium
Letter Gothic Italic
Letter Gothic Bold
Marigold Medium
Univers Medium
CG Omega Bold Italic
CG Times Medium
CG Times Italic
Univers Italic
Univers Bold
CG Times Bold
Univers Bold Italic
Univers Cond. Medium
Univers Cond. Italic
Univers Cond. Bold
Univers Cond. Bold Italic
CG Times Bold Italic
Clarendon Cond. Bold
Coronet Medium Italic
Courier Medium
Courier Italic
Courier Bold
Courier Bold Italic
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r
The printers have one resident bitmap font called Line
PCL Bitmap Font
Printer. It comes in only one typeface, weight, and posture.
The Line Printer font may be used to provide:
•
•
Line printer emulation for a print job.
Backward compatibility for those applications that make
use of the line printer font.
To review the PCL fonts in your printer, print a PCL Font List
(page 3-63).
Note
4-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A d d i n g F o n t s
Utilizing fonts in addition to resident fonts can add new
Adding Fonts
dimensions to your work. Additional fonts are available
through the following:
•
•
•
PostScript option. See “PostScript” (page 4-9).
Font cards for PCL fonts. See “Font Cards” (page 4-10).
Software applications. See “Fonts within Software
Applications” (page 4-11).
Thirty-five PostScript fonts (Adobe Type 1) are available to
your printer, either factory-installed on the 4505ps and
4510ps printers, or user-installable on the 4505 and 4510
printers as an option. See Appendix D: Ordering Information
for more information on the PostScript option.
PostScript
Many additional PostScript fonts are available through Adobe
Systems, Inc. and may be used when the PostScript option is
installed on your printer.
If you have a 4505ps or 4510ps printer, see “PostScript Menu”
(page 3-29) for PostScript printer settings.
PostScript fonts are used by the PostScript Level 2 printer
language. If you plan to program in the PostScript Level 2
printer language, refer to Adobe Systems, Inc. PostScript
language reference documentation.
The Lang. Sensing settings in the Parallel (page 3-42), Serial
(page 3-46), Ethernet (page 3-52), and Token Ring (page 3-55)
Menus enable automatic switching between the PostScript
and PCL printer languages. PostScript and PCL fonts are not
interchangeable.
Note
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A d d i n g F o n t s
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are equipped
with two font card slots. See page 1-3 for the physical location
of the slots. See Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options for font
card installation.
Font Cards
Font cards for the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps contain PCL
fonts only. In addition, font cards may contain one or more
scalable fonts or bitmapped fonts. However, bitmapped and
scalable fonts are not mixed on the same card.
A font card may contain its own default font. In this case, its
default font becomes the printer’s default font. To change the
default font, see Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, Font
Source (page 3-19).
To avoid problems when inserting or removing a font card,
take the printer offline by pressing Online
!
Caution
PCL font cards may be purchased from Xerox / Rank Xerox.
See Appendix D: Ordering Information.
4-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A d d i n g F o n t s
Certain software applications offer additional fonts to those
supplied with your printer. These fonts are stored on the host
and then downloaded into printer memory by the software
application when printing.
Fonts within
Software
Applications
Unless specified as permanently downloaded fonts (see
page 4-13), software application fonts are downloaded to
printer memory before being used for a specific printer job,
and are removed from printer memory after completion of
that print job.
Installation of the Xerox printer driver provides the printer
with the capability of recognizing which fonts are resident
and which are not. Selecting resident fonts saves memory
and time.
Note
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S e l e c t i n g
a
F o n t
How is a font selected for printing?
Selecting
a Font
The general answer is that you select a font within the
application you are running. For example, if you are using a
word processing application, you will select a font from the
font list within the application.
If desired, you may select a font (PCL fonts only) from the
Control Panel or Remote User Interface (RUI). For an
explanation of how to do this, see Chapter 3: Using the
Control Panel, Font Number (page 3-20), or refer to the
Documentation Services for Printing Guide for the RUI.
A font selected from the Control Panel or RUI becomes the
default font for the printer unless overridden by the selection
of a different font from your software application.
4-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s
Whether you do or do not use additional fonts, it is helpful to
know a few facts about how the printer uses fonts either
resident in the printer or downloaded (transferred) from the
host.
Downloading
Fonts
Each time you specify a font in a document to be printed, the
font is downloaded to printer, unless the font is already:
•
•
Resident in the printer’s ROM (read-only memory)—PCL
only.
Specified in the printer driver as permanently
downloaded to the printer’s internal memory—PCL only.
•
•
Installed on the PostScript card—PostScript only.
Installed on a font card—PCL only.
Consult your software application’s user documentation for
a discussion of fonts associated with that application.
Temporary and Temporary fonts are PCL fonts downloaded for a particular
print job. As soon as the print job is finished, the fonts are
Permanent Fonts
cleared from memory. They must be downloaded for each
print job that uses them. Downloading may have an impact
on performance, depending on the number of fonts being
downloaded. As a result, the print job using downloaded
fonts may take longer than one using resident fonts.
As an example, when you print a mostly-text document in a
resident font, printing time is optimal.
If you print that same document using a downloaded font, the
time to print the first page is substantially longer than it was
for your resident-font document. The remaining pages also
take longer to print than those of the resident-font document.
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s
For optimal performance, use resident fonts whenever
applicable since they do not require downloading time.
Note
Permanently downloaded fonts are PCL fonts downloaded in
the same way temporary fonts are, but they remain
downloaded for all print jobs until the printer is powered off.
They are permanent only as long as the printer is on.
Similar to resident fonts or those on font cards, permanently
downloaded fonts reduce the processing time for a print job
that uses them. The distinction is that permanently
downloaded fonts occupy printer memory that might be used
otherwise.
How do you know if a font is permanently downloaded?
•
•
Specify a font to be permanently downloaded when it is
installed or setup within a software application.
Print a PCL Font List (page 3-63) to see all resident fonts,
all fonts installed on any font card, and all permanently
downloaded fonts.
4-14 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s
In general, it is not recommended that you permanently
download fonts. Even if unused, permanent fonts occupy
printer memory that cannot be used for other purposes.
Note
In a networked environment, carefully coordinate the use of
permanently downloaded fonts. Avoid allowing multiple
users to specify permanently downloaded fonts since printer
memory may be consumed rapidly and may cause printer
faults.
Additional memory (SIMMs) will enable the printer to hold
more downloaded fonts. See Chapter 1: Introduction,
“Memory Considerations” (page 1-6) and Chapter 5: Adding
Printer Options for more information about printer memory.
C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s
❖
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-16 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Adding Printer Options
5
retpahC
Overview ............................................................................... 5-2
Installing a SIMM .................................................................. 5-4
Installing a Font Card ......................................................... 5-19
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
The following printer options are available for the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers:
Overview
•
4 MB or 16 MB SIMM. One 4 MB SIMM is
factory-installed on the 4505ps and 4510ps printers.
SIMMs (single in-line memory modules) are small circuit
boards with memory chips that can be installed on the
printer controller board. Up to two SIMMs can be
installed in the printers. The maximum memory capacity
of the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps is 16 MB. See
“Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4).
•
PostScript. Factory-installed on the 4505ps and 4510ps
printers.
Adobe Postscript Level 2 is available to your printer,
either factory-installed or as an option.
If using a 4505ps or 4510ps printer, refer to the PostScript
Option Installation Instructions packaged with the
printer. Also, see Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel,
“PostScript Menu” (page 3-29).
•
•
•
250-sheet lower base with paper tray
The 250-sheet lower base comes with a universal tray.
See Chapter 2: Handling Paper, “Optional Lower Base”
(page 2-13).
500-sheet lower base with paper tray
The 500-sheet lower base comes with either an A4 or
8.5 x 11 (Letter) tray. See Chapter 2: Handling Paper,
“Optional Lower Base” (page 2-13).
Paper trays
A variety of trays may be ordered separately for the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers. See
Chapter 2: Handling Paper, “Paper Trays” (page 2-8).
5-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
•
Ethernet card
The Xerox Network Interface Card – Ethernet
(XNIC-E’NET) supports the Novell, TCP/IP, EtherTalk,
DecLat, and LAN Manager protocols and is equipped
with both BNC and RJ-45 connectors.
See Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, “Ethernet Menu
Options” (page 3-51).
•
•
LocalTalk card
The Xerox Network Interface Card – LocalTalk
(XNIC-L’TALK) supports the AppleTalk protocols and is
equipped with a DIN-8 connector.
See Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, “LocalTalk Menu
Option” (page 3-50).
Token Ring card
The Xerox Network Interface Card – Token Ring
(XNIC-T’RING) supports the Novell and LAN Manager
protocols and is equipped with both RJ-45 and female
DE-9 connectors.
See Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel, “Token Ring
Menu Options” (page 3-54).
•
Font card
Font cards are inserted into one or both of the font card
slots in the printer. Font cards hold additional PCL fonts.
See “Installing a Font Card” (page 5-19).
You can order any of these printer options from your dealer or
Xerox / Rank Xerox. See Appendix D: Ordering Information
for complete details.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Since SIMMs are available from manufacturers other than
Xerox and might not contain installation instructions for the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers, installation
instructions are provided here.
Installing a
SIMM
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are equipped
with 2 MB of resident base memory. To expand printer
memory capacity, install up to two 4 MB or 16 MB SIMMs on
the printer controller board. (The total maximum memory
capacity is 16 MB.)
4505ps and 4510ps Users:
The 4505ps and 4510ps are each equipped with a
pre-installed 4 MB SIMM for a total of 6 MB of memory.
Note
To install a SIMM in the printer follow the steps below:
5-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Be sure you have a ream of paper on hand before you begin
this procedure.
Power OFF [0] the
1
printer.
Disconnect the power
2
cord and remove all
cables.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Remove any installed
font cards.
3
Release the rear cover
latches.
4
5-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Remove the rear
cover to expose the
thumb screws.
5
With your fingers,
loosen the
6
thumbscrews.
Thumbscrews are not
removable.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
SIMMs and controller boards are sensitive to static electricity.
Before installing a SIMM, discharge static electricity from
your body by touching something metal, such as the metal
back plate on the printer. If you walk around before finishing
the installation, again discharge any static electricity.
!
Caution
Never remove the printer controller board while the printer is
plugged in.
To remove the
7
controller board, pull
the handle with firm,
but even force.
5-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Place the controller
board on a ream of
paper.
8
This is required to
properly support the
board during
installation of the
SIMM.
Locate the SIMM slots
on the printer
9
controller board.
If you need to replace
a currently installed
SIMM, continue with
Step 10.
If you do not need to
replace a SIMM, skip
to Step 12 (page 5-11).
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
When removing a SIMM,
be careful not to damage
the locking clips located
at each end of the SIMM
slot. They may break if
too much pressure is
applied.
!
Caution
Carefully release the
clips of the SIMM you
are replacing.
10
11
Lift the SIMM out of
the slot.
5-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Insert the new SIMM
into either SIMM slot.
12
Be careful not to damage
the locking clips located
at each end of the SIMM
slot. They may break if
too much pressure is
applied.
!
Caution
Press the SIMM down
until the clips lock it in
place.
13
The SIMM will sit at an
angle.
Install additional
SIMMs in the same
manner.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Replace the printer
controller board.
14
Align the edge of the
board in the guide rails
and seat the controller
board firmly.
Push the controller
board firmly into
place.
15
5-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Ensure that the
16
controller board is
touching the rear of
the printer chassis.
There must be no
space between the
controller board and
the chassis.
Inspect this area to verify
that there is no gap between
the printer controller board
and the chassis.
Use only finger pressure to tighten the thumbscrews. Do not
use a screwdriver because the threads will be stripped if
excessive torque is applied. The screwdriver slot in the
thumbscrew is only there to start the disengagement of the
controller board after an extended period of time when
fingers may not be able to disengage it.
!
Caution
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Tighten the
17
Note
thumbscrews using
only your fingers.
Do not use tools.
If the thumbscrews do not
easily turn, reseat the
controller board and try
again.
Replace the rear cover.
18
5-14 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Reinstall any font
cards removed in
Step 3.
19
Reconnect cables and
the power cord.
20
At this point, you need to print a Configuration Sheet
to verify that you have properly installed the SIMMs.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Power ON [1] the
printer.
1
If the printer does not
turn on:
•
•
Power OFF [0].
Check all
connections and
the electrical
supply outlet.
•
Power ON [1].
If the printer still does
not turn on, reseat the
controller board.
On the Control Panel, you may briefly see some
messages. Then you will see the message:
2
3
Online
Ready
___
Press Online
You will see:
Offline
_/_
Press a key...
Press Menu
4
5
You will see:
Main Menu
Language
>
Press Down
or Up
until you see:
Main Menu
Test Menu
>
5-16 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Press Enter
6
7
You will see:
Test Menu
Config. Sheet
Press Enter
again to start printing a
Configuration Sheet.
You will see:
Config. Sheet
Printing...
The Configuration Sheet requires a minute or so to
print.
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
S I M M
Verify the SIMM has been correctly installed.
8
Xerox 4510 Desktop Laser Printer
Configuration Sheet
On your Configuration Sheet, the “Total system
memory” value should match the amount of memory
you just installed plus the RAM resident on the
printer.
Total prints
=
0
Total system memory
=
0
KB
Software version
Installed options:
=
00.00.00
None
-
00.00.00
Total system memory = nnnn KB
Main Menu
Parallel Menu
Port Enable
Language
=
English
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
On
30
PCL
On
On
On
Port Timeout
System Language
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Bidirectional
Transfer Rate
s
System Menu
Hex Dump
=
=
=
=
=
=
Off
Once
On
Off
2
Chime
System Messages
Auto Continue
Print Density
Defaults
Low
Note that:
USA
Serial Menu
Port Enable
Port Timeout
System Language
Lang. Sensing
Auto Job End
Port Type
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
On
30
PCL
On
On
RS232
9600
Robust XON
High
8
None
1
PCL Menu
Copies
Font Source
Font Number
Pitch
s
=
=
=
=
=
=
1
Internal
0
10.00
12.00
Standard
Point Size
Baud Rate
Default Source
Source Mapping
Standard
Handshake
DTR Polarity
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
•
•
4 MB SIMM = 4096 KB
16 MB SIMM = 16384 KB
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Standard
Manual
Manual
MP-Standard
Standard-MP
Manual
A4 (210x297)
A4 (210x297)
Portrait
64
Roman-8
A4
On
300x300
On
Off
Manual
Manual Envelope
Lower
Large Capacity
Envelope Feeder
Paper Size
MP Tray Size
Orientation
Form Length
Symbol Set
Page Protection
Jam Recovery
Resolution
Resol.Enh.(EET)
State Saving
For example, if you installed a 4 MB SIMM on a new
4510:
The Document Company
Resident Memory 2048 KB
+ SIMM
4096 KB
======
6144 KB
Total
If the total system memory value is not correct,
reinstall the SIMM.
The printer recognizes up to a total of 16 MB only.
Note
5-18 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
F o n t C a r d
To install a font card in the printer, follow the steps below:
Installing a
Font Card
Press Online
to
1
take the printer offline.
Online
Ready
___
Insert a font card into
either font card slot.
2
Press Online
to
3
put the printer online.
Offline
___
Press a key...
C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
❖
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I n s t a l l i n g
a
F o n t C a r d
To verify that the printer recognizes the font card as
installed, print a PCL Font List (see page 3-63).
4
When installing PCMCIA font cards, printing a PCL Font List
will verify that the cards have been inserted correctly and are
recognized by the printer. If the PCL Font List does not show
the fonts on the cards, reinsert the font cards or cycle the
power on the printer and print another PCL Font List to verify
that the fonts on the PCMCIA cards are recognized.
Note
5-20 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Maintaining the Printer
6
retpahC
Overview ............................................................................... 6-2
Replacing the EP Cartridge .................................................. 6-3
Fuser Cleaning Cycle ............................................................. 6-9
Adjusting the Print Density ............................................... 6-12
Cleaning the Printer ........................................................... 6-13
Transporting the Printer ..................................................... 6-14
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
Maintaining the printer in good operating condition is
essential to having a reliable, well-running machine.
Overview
This chapter describes the following:
•
•
•
•
EP (electronic printing) cartridge replacement
Fuser cleaning
Regular cleaning
Hints for transporting the printer
6-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
An EP (electronic printing) cartridge will print approximately
4,000 pages of A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) paper, under average
operating conditions (5% area coverage). The number of
prints per one EP cartridge will decrease if you routinely:
Replacing the
EP Cartridge
•
•
•
Print dense text and graphics.
Set Print Density (page 3-59) to a dark setting.
Exceed five percent area coverage.
An EP cartridge contains both microfine toner and imaging
drum.
The EP cartridge is clean, efficient, and can be recycled.
Note
The printer will alert you to the need to replace the EP
cartridge by displaying this message:
Toner Low
To order a new EP cartridge (part number 113R5), contact
your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
To replace the EP cartridge, follow the steps below:
Remove the
1
Multipurpose (MP)
tray, if installed.
To avoid damaging the
hinge, support the front
cover with your hands
while opening it. Do not
allow the cover to fall
open.
!
Caution
Press the side latches
down to release and
open the front cover.
2
6-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
Follow these guidelines to make sure the EP cartridge is
properly installed:
!
•
Do not expose the EP cartridge to direct sunlight or
fluorescent light for more than 15 minutes. Overexposure
will permanently damage the photosensitive imaging
drum.
Caution
•
•
Do not open the drum shutter or touch the
imaging drum.
Complete the EP cartridge installation within 15 minutes
of removing it from its package.
Remove the old EP
3
cartridge.
Please recycle it.
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
Unwrap, then shake
the new EP cartridge 6
to 8 times to evenly
distribute the toner.
4
To avoid breaking the tab
or tape, pull the tab out,
not up. If the tab
separates from the tape,
continue to pull the tape.
!
Caution
Place the EP cartridge
on a flat surface; pull
the tab and tape from
the EP cartridge.
5
You may have to pull
firmly.
Dispose of the tab and
tape.
6-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
Insert the EP cartridge
6
into the guide
channels marked by
yellow arrows.
The cartridge fits
securely inside the
printer.
Close the front cover.
7
Be sure the cover is
completely closed and
latches locked.
If the front cover does
not close, reseat the
EP cartridge.
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e
If needed, reinstall the
Multipurpose (MP)
tray.
8
Perform the Fuser Cleaning Cycle.
9
See “Fuser Cleaning Cycle” (page 6-9) for the fuser
cleaning procedure.
6-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F u s e r C l e a n i n g C y c l e
To run the fuser cleaning cycle, follow the steps below.
Fuser
Cleaning Cycle
Whenever you replace an EP cartridge, run the fuser cleaning
cycle. This will prevent paper jams caused by dirty fuser
components.
Note
On the Control Panel, press Online
1
You will see:
Offline
_/_
Press a key...
The fuser cleaning process uses three sheets of A4 or
8.5 x 11 (Letter) paper. Be sure there is paper loaded
in the standard paper source.
Press Menu
You will see:
Main Menu
2
Language
>
Press Up
or Down
until you see:
3
Main Menu
Test Menu
>
Press Enter
You will see:
Test Menu
4
Config. Sheet
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F u s e r C l e a n i n g C y c l e
Press Up
or Down
until you see:
5
Test Menu
Fuser Cleaning
Press Enter
6
You will see:
Fuser Cleaning
Printing...
Three sheets of paper—called the cleaning
sheets—will be printed with a black band across the
page.
Wait for the Control Panel to display:
7
Fuser Cleaning
Waiting...
All three cleaning sheets will have been printed.
Place the three cleaning sheets PRINTED SIDE
DOWN, arrow toward the printer, in the standard
paper tray.
8
9
Press Enter
to begin the fuser cleaning cycle.
You will see:
Fuser Cleaning
Please Wait...
No print image will be made while the cleaning sheets
are being processed.
When the cleaning process is complete, the Control
Panel display automatically returns to:
10
Main Menu
Test Menu
>
6-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F u s e r C l e a n i n g C y c l e
On the Control Panel, press Online
11
You will see:
Online
Ready
___
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A d j u s t i n g t h e P r i n t D e n s i t y
The print density was adjusted at the factory to provide
Adjusting
the Print
Density
optimum print quality. However, should you desire to darken
or lighten the print density, follow the steps below.
Select the System Menu (see page 3-57).
1
2
Select Print Density.
The print choices are from 0 to 4. 0 is the lightest and 4
is the darkest.
If the desired print density cannot be achieved, see
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting, “Print Quality Problems”
(page 7-29).
6-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C l e a n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
For optimum performance, the printer should not be placed
near vents or dust-producing equipment. Particles in the air
may enter the printer and cause failures in internal
mechanisms
Cleaning
the Printer
For best results, clean the outside of the printer with a damp
cloth. Do not use detergents.
Make sure the printer is powered OFF [0] before you clean it.
!
Caution
C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r
❖
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T r a n s p o r t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
When transporting the printer more than a short distance,
Transporting
the Printer
follow the guidelines shown in Figure 6.1.
Figure 6.1 Hints for transporting the printer
Helpful Hints for Moving the Printer
Use the original shipping box and materials. If the original box or
materials are not available or are unusable, use a sturdy packing box and
a generous amount of cushioning or packing material.
1. Remove and pack the Multipurpose Tray.
2. Remove the EP cartridge and pack it in sturdy, light-proof material.
A sealed bag is recommended to prevent toner leakage.
3. Push in the Output Tray support so that it is flush with the
edge of the printer.
4. Disconnect and pack the printer. Remove and pack all printer cables.
If the printer is on a network, refer to your network software guide
or consult with the Network Administrator before disconnecting the
network cable.
5. Disconnect and pack the power cord.
6. Locate and pack all documentation for the printer.
7. Place the printer, accessories, and documentation in the
original box or in a similar box.
8. Make sure packing materials will inhibit breakage and jarring.
6-14 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
7
retpahC
Overview ............................................................................... 7-2
Before Calling for Service 7-2
Locating Your Printer’s Serial Number 7-4
Displayed Control Panel Messages ..................................... 7-5
Paper Jams .......................................................................... 7-19
Clearing Paper Jams from the Standard Tray or Lower
Base 7-21
Clearing Paper Jams from the MP tray 7-25
Printer Operational Problems ............................................ 7-26
Print Quality Problems ....................................................... 7-29
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while
using your 4505/4505ps or 4510/4510ps, and provides some
possible solutions to these problems. This chapter will help
you troubleshoot problems associated with:
Overview
•
•
•
•
Displayed control panel messages
Paper transport
Printer operation
Deterioration of print quality
If you encounter a problem, locate the type of problem in this
section and perform the suggested corrective actions. If you
are unable to resolve the problem, contact your dealer or
Xerox / Rank Xerox for service.
Before calling for service, be sure you have thoroughly
reviewed the troubleshooting section provided for your type
of problem and have performed the suggested corrective
actions.
Before Calling for
Service
When calling for service, be prepared to provide the
following information:
•
The serial number of your printer. See “Locating Your
Printer’s Serial Number” (page 7-4).
•
•
Your name and your company’s name
A description of the problem, including the severity of the
problem:
— Critical
Printer is down and/or user has no production
capability
– inability of a critical application (job) to run
– frequency of failure precludes production use
– critical integrity defect
7-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
— Serious
Printer is operational but production capability is
seriously degraded
– inability of a major application (job) to run
– failure requires frequent operational intervention to
maintain productivity
– non-critical integrity defect
— Moderate
Printer is operational, but production capability is
reduced
– a non-critical application (job) can not be printed
– continuing, but infrequent failure requiring
operational intervention
– a non-critical product feature or function does not
work
•
If any special conditions have occurred:
— New application (job) being run?
— Did application run correctly before?
— Have there been any modifications to the application
(job)?
— Have there been any modifications to the host
system?
— Has service been performed recently on the printer?
— Does application (job) print properly on another
printer (either Xerox or other type which supports
same emulation)?
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O v e r v i e w
Also have available:
•
Any error code or message displayed on the Control
Panel
•
•
•
A copy of the Configuration Sheet
A copy of the output with the problem
A copy of the print job as it was input
If possible, be near the printer when you call so you can
perform any suggested corrective actions.
Your printer’s serial number is located on the printer frame
behind the rear cover. See Figure 7.1.
Locating Your
Printer’s Serial
Number
Figure 7.1 Locating your printer’s serial number
serial number
7-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Control Panel messages are listed in alphabetical order in
Figure 7.2, preceded by numerical diagnostic error codes.
Displayed
Control Panel
Messages
Not listed are the Control Panel menu options, settings, or
functions covered in Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel.
Some two-line messages are separated by the top line and
bottom line. In these instances, look up each line of the
message separately.
Note
In Figure 7.2, “ACTION” indicates what you must do to
respond to or clear the message.
You might see a five digit number in the lower right of the
Control Panel. Five-digit codes are for use by manufacturing
and service centers only. The user can ignore five-digit codes.
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages
Message
Description/Action
0001†
The main controller board has failed.
†
Appears in the top left
ACTION: Replace controller, or contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
side of the display.
Indicates which module
failed.
0040†
A PostScript checksum error has occurred.
†
Appears in the top left
side of the display.
Indicates which module
failed.
ACTION: The PostScript card has failed and needs to be replaced.
0100†
SIMM in slot 0 has failed.
†
Appears in the top left
ACTION: Move the SIMM to Slot 1; see “Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4). If a
memory error (0101) occurs again, replace the SIMM. If there is no error, the main
controller board has failed. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
side of the display.
Indicates which module
failed.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
0101†
SIMM in slot 1 has failed.
†
Appears in the top left
ACTION: Move the SIMM to Slot 0; see “Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4). If a
memory error (0100) occurs again, replace the SIMM. If there is no error, the main
controller board has failed. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
side of the display.
Indicates which module
failed.
1000†
Communication has failed between the printer controller and the printer.
†
Appears in the top left
side of the display.
Indicates which module
failed.
ACTION: Verify the controller board is seated properly. If the message still appears,
replace the controller, replace the interface between the controller and printer
engine, or replace the print engine; or, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
2000†
A key on the Control Panel is stuck in the down position.
†
Appears in the top left
ACTION: Press any key. If no response, the Control Panel may need to be replaced.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
side of the display.
Indicates which module
failed.
Upper and lower font cards were removed while the printer was offline, but the
cards were still being used by the software application.
Both Cards Out
Replace Original
ACTION: To clear the error message and resume printing, reseat or reinstall the
cards. Press Online
On completion of the print job, you can take the printer
offline and remove the cards.
Both the upper and lower font cards were removed while the printer was online.
ACTION: Power OFF the printer, then power it ON to resume.
Card Err. both
Power Off & On
The main cover is open.
Close Cover
Comm. Error
ACTION: Close it, then press Online
to resume normal operation.
If your printer is configured for serial, a framing or parity error has occurred on the
serial interface.
ACTION: You have a mismatch between your printer and the host. Check your
printer serial configuration (baud rate, handshake, parity, etc.) to be certain the
serial settings match your host (page 3-45). If problem persists, contact your dealer
or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
If your printer is configured for parallel, the printer is not able to communicate
with the host using bidirectional parallel.
ACTION: Check the parallel cable to make sure it is connected properly on both
the printer and the host. Inspect the parallel cable for any defects; if wires are
broken or the cable appears to be damaged, replace the cable. Check the host to
be certain that it is configured properly. Under the Parallel Menu, turn
Bidirectional Off. If problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
7-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
The Configuration Sheet is printing.
Config. Sheet
Printing...
See Config. Sheet, page 3-62.
ACTION: None
The Ethernet card (XNIC-E’NET) has failed and cannot be used.
Ethernet Fail
ACTION: Press Enter
to allow the printer to continue as if the Ethernet card
were not installed. This error is not subject to Auto Continue (page 3-59). Print a
Configuration Sheet. If the sheet does not show Ethernet as present, contact your
dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
For PostScript only, the print job could not be printed and is being parsed out and
discarded.
Flushing…
ACTION: The message remains until the print job being flushed is complete, which
may require further data to be sent from the host.
The Fuser Cleaning (page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.
Fuser Cleaning
Please Wait...
This message appears when the three cleaning sheets have been printed, placed in
the input tray, and are now being fed into the printer.
ACTION: None
The Fuser Cleaning (page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.
The three cleaning sheets are being printed.
ACTION: None
Fuser Cleaning
Printing...
The Fuser Cleaning (page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.
Fuser Cleaning
Waiting...
The cleaning sheets have been printed.
ACTION: Place the three cleaning sheets, printed side down and arrow toward
printer, in the standard paper tray. Press Enter
Fuser assembly has failed; printing cannot resume.
ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Fuser Failure
Service Required
Hex dump mode is On.
Hex Dump
Used for debugging. See Hex Dump (page 3-58).
ACTION: None
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
The EP cartridge is missing or not installed correctly.
Install
EP Cartridge
ACTION: Reseat existing cartridge or install a new cartridge. See “Replacing the EP
Cartridge” (page 6-3). If problem continues, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) has failed on the print engine (also called the
IOT—Image Output Terminal). Printing cannot resume.
IOT NVM Fail
Service Required
ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Laser assembly has failed; printing cannot continue.
ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Laser Failure
Service Required
The printer was busy processing data from a host but the last page was not
completed and the last page timeout has expired.
Last Page
This message appears until either:
• More data arrives.
or
• Port Time Out expires and Auto Job End is On.
or
• PostScript “waittimeout” expires.
ACTION: None.
ACTION: Load A4 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
ACTION: Load A5 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
Load A4
Load A5
Load B5
This message is for the manual bypass slot (MP tray) only.
ACTION: Load B5 (ISO) paper into the MP tray.
ACTION: Load C5 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
Load C5
ACTION: Load Com-10 envelopes (or paper) into the tray(s) indicated on the top
line of the display.
Load Com-10
ACTION: Load DL envelopes (or paper) into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of
the display.
Load DL
ACTION: Load Executive paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the
display.
Load Exec
Load Folio
ACTION: Load Folio paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
7-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
ACTION: Load Legal paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
ACTION: Load Letter paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.
Load Legal
Load Letter
Load Monarch
ACTION: Load Monarch envelopes into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the
display.
The LocalTalk card (XNIC-L’TALK) has failed and cannot be used.
LocalTalk Fail
ACTION: Press Enter
to allow the printer to continue as if the LocalTalk card
were not installed. This error is not subject to Auto Continue (page 3-59). Print a
Configuration Sheet. If the sheet does not show LocalTalk as present, contact your
dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Lower tray needs paper.
Lower
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper to load. Either
load that size or press Enter
Lower font card was removed while the printer was online.
Lower Card Err
Power OFF & ON
ACTION: Power OFF [0] the printer, then power it ON [1] to resume normal
operations.
Lower font card was removed while the printer was offline, but the card was still
being used by the software application.
Lower Card Out
Replace Original
ACTION: To clear the error message, take the printer offline and return the card to
its slot. Then press Online
to resume printing. On completion of the print
job, you can take the printer offline and remove the card.
The lower tray does not contain paper.
ACTION: Load paper in the lower tray.
Lower Tray Empty
Lower Tray Out
Low-Std-MP
The lower tray has been removed or is not properly inserted.
ACTION: Insert lower tray.
Paper needs to be added to the lower, standard, or MP tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
Paper needs to be added to the lower or MP tray.
Lower-MP
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
Paper needs to be added to the lower or standard tray.
Lower-Standard
MP Tray
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
The printer is requesting paper in the MP tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper to insert. You
may use the paper size requested or any size the MP tray will accept. If the paper
size requested is not the same as the MP Tray Size, press Enter
See “Multipurpose Tray” (page 2-11).
Paper needs to be added to the MP, lower, or standard tray.
MP-Low-Std
MP-Lower
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
Paper needs to be added to the MP or lower tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
Paper needs to be added to the MP or standard tray.
MP-Standard
MP-Std-Low
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
Paper needs to be added to the MP, standard, or lower tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
Memory Check was invoked from the Test Menu. See “Test Menu” (page 3-61).
The printer resets upon completion.
Memory Check
Please Wait...
ACTION: None
Printer controller memory has failed; printing cannot resume.
ACTION:
Memory Failure
Service Required
• Perform a Memory Check (page 3-64) to see if you can locate the problem.
• Try powering OFF [0] the printer then ON [1] again.
If the problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Nonvolatile memory in the printer engine or controller has failed; printing cannot
resume.
NV Memory Fail
Service Required
ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
7-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
Printer is offline, not in menu mode, and without any fault conditions.
Offline _/_
Offline does not mean the printer is disconnected from the computer. It means
page formatting and printing are halted.
ACTION: To put the printer online, press Online
Printer is online and either processing data or ready to accept print jobs.
ACTION: None
Online ___
Printer has a paper jam.
Open Cover
Clear Paper Path
ACTION: Open the cover and remove paper from the paper path. See “Paper
Jams” (page 7-19).
Current job cannot print because it exceeds available memory.
See “Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67).
• For PCL, the bottom line displays, Press *
Out of Memory
–
Even though Auto Continue (page 3-59) may be On, you will see
the message below for ten seconds:
Press *
–
The printer waits ten seconds, then resumes (in effect, pressing
Enter
for you).
• For PostScript, it displays Flushing...
The page is ejected from the printer. Depending on the cause of the problem, your
print job may continue or be ended.
ACTION:
• Reduce resolution to 300 dpi.
• Install additional memory. See “Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4).
• Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
In PCL, the printing on a page is broken up into horizontal bands. When Page
Protection is Off, as a page is processed, each band has a limited time to be
composed and imprinted on the page. Page Too Complex means the current
page cannot print because there is not enough time to compose it.
Page Too Complex
ACTION: Press Enter
The page will be ejected and the print job will
continue. The page that was too complex will be printed on more than one sheet
of paper. To achieve printing on one sheet, set Page Protection (page 3-26) to
the appropriate page size and send the print job again.
Even though Auto Continue (page 3-59) may be On, you will see the message
below for ten seconds:
Press *
The printer waits ten seconds, then resumes (in effect, pressing Enter
for
you).
PCL Font List (page 3-63) is printing.
PCL Font List
Printing...
ACTION: None
The Fuser Cleaning (page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.
Three fuser cleaning sheets have been printed.
Please Read
Last Print
ACTION: Read and follow the instructions printed on the fuser cleaning sheets.
Power consumption is reduced by means of the power saver mode.
Power Saver
On
When no printing has occurred for 10 minutes, the printer will automatically go
into Power Saver mode.
ACTION: None (Treat this message the same as the “Online/Ready” message.)
The printer has a PCL error.
Press *
ACTION: Press Enter
This message functions with the System Menu option Auto Continue
(page 3-59). When Auto Continue is On, this message is cleared automatically
after ten seconds, and normal printing operation resumes.
The printer has just been taken offline.
Press a key...
Processing...
ACTION: No more processing can take place until you press another key (any key).
Printer is processing data from a computer for printing.
ACTION: None
7-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
List of PostScript fonts (page 3-63) is printing.
PS Font List
Printing...
ACTION: None
Printer is online and waiting for data to print.
ACTION: None
Ready
Reset Menus has been invoked from the Reset Menu (page 3-65).
Reset Menus
Please Wait...
Returns all menu settings except the Language (page 3-14) setting and the
System Menu Defaults (page 3-60) setting to their factory setting and clears any
print jobs, temporary fonts, and macros from memory.
ACTION: None
Reset Printer or Reset All has been invoked from the Reset Menu (page 3-65).
Reset Printer
Please Wait...
The printer clears any print jobs and temporary fonts and macros from memory,
then goes online.
ACTION: None
The printer is in power-on diagnostics. This message appears shortly after
power-on as soon as the Control Panel is initialized and can display text.
Self Test...
If there is no failure during power-on diagnostics, the next message displayed will
indicate the printer is online and ready to receive data.
ACTION: None
Standard tray needs paper.
Standard
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to
load. Either load that size, or press Enter
Paper needs to be added to either the standard or lower tray.
Standard-Lower
Standard-MP
Std-Low-MP
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
Paper needs to be added to either the standard or MP tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
Paper needs to be added to the standard, lower, or MP tray.
ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope
to load. Either load that size, or press Enter
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
The standard tray does not contain paper.
ACTION: Add paper to the standard tray.
Std. Tray Empty
The standard tray has been removed or is not properly inserted.
ACTION: Insert the standard tray.
Std. Tray Out
The printer was busy processing PCL data from a host system but the job was not
completed since temporary fonts and macros were not deleted. The last page
timeout has expired.
Temp Font/Macro
This message appears until:
• Another print job is received.
• The Port Timeout expires and Auto Job End is On. See Chapter 3: Using the
Control Panel, “Interface Menu” (page 3-37).
ACTION: None
A Test Print is being printed (for use by service technicians).
The message clears once the printing is completed.
ACTION: None
Test Print
Printing...
The Token Ring card (XNIC-T’RING) has failed and cannot be used.
Token Ring Fail
ACTION: Press Enter
to allow the printer to continue as if the Token Ring
card were not installed. This error is not subject to Auto Continue (page 3-59).
Print a Configuration Sheet. If the sheet does not show Token Ring as present,
contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Toner is getting low in the EP cartridge, but printing will continue without
interruption.
Toner Low
ACTION: Replace the EP cartridge as soon as possible.
A fatal error has occurred.
Turn Power Off
Then On
ACTION: Power OFF [0], then ON [1].
Upper font card was removed while the printer was online.
Upper Card Err
Power Off & On
ACTION: Power OFF [0] the printer, then power it ON [1] to resume normal
operations.
7-14 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
Upper font card was removed while the printer was offline, but the card was still
being used by the application.
Upper Card Out
Replace Original
ACTION: To clear the error message, take the printer offline and return the card to
its slot. Then press Online
to resume printing. On completion of the print
job, you can take the printer offline and remove the card.
The printer was busy processing data from a host but the print job was not
completed.
Waiting...
This message appears until:
• Another print job is received.
• The Port Timeout expires and Auto Job End is On. See Chapter 3: Using the
Control Panel, “Interface Menu” (page 3-37).
• The last page timeout expires.
• The PostScript “waittimeout” expires. Refer to the PostScript reference
documentation.
ACTION: None
Fuser has not warmed up yet.
Warming up
Please Wait...
Message disappears when the printer is ready. The message displays at power-on
and may display after the cover has been opened for some time or when the
printer is exiting power-saver mode.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to A4; appears in PostScript when the page size is A4 and the
printer has changed resolution to 300.
Warning 300/A4
Warning 300/A5
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to A5; appears in PostScript when the page size is A5 and the
printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to B5; appears in PostScript when the page size is B5 and the
printer has changed resolution to 300.
Warning 300/B5
Warning 300/C10
Warning 300/C5
Warning 300/DL
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to Com-10; appears in PostScript when the page size is Com-10
and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to C5; appears in PostScript when the page size is C5 and the
printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to DL; appears in PostScript when the page size is DL and the
printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
7-16 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to Executive; appears in PostScript when the page size is Executive
and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
Warning 300/EXE
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to Folio; appears in PostScript when the page size is Folio and the
printer has changed resolution to 300.
Warning 300/FOL
Warning 300/LGL
Warning 300/LTR
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to Legal; appears in PostScript when the page size is Legal and the
printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to Letter; appears in PostScript when the page size is Letter and
the printer has changed resolution to 300.
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s
Figure 7.2 Control Panel messages (continued)
Message
Description/Action
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to Monarch; appears in PostScript when the page size is Monarch
and the printer has changed resolution to 300.
Warning 300/MON
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or
page protection to OFF.
Warning 300/OFF
This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with
the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.
The message clears when the next job prints.
ACTION: None
7-18 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r J a m s
Your printer has been designed to provide reliable, trouble
free operation. However, it is not unusual to experience an
occasional paper jam. Paper jams occur most often when:
Paper Jams
•
The paper stock does not meet specification. See “Paper
Specifications” (page 2-6).
•
•
The paper stock is in poor condition.
The paper stock has been improperly loaded into the
paper trays. See “Loading Paper” (page 2-14).
•
•
The printer needs cleaning. See “Fuser Cleaning Cycle”
(page 6-9).
Printer parts have worn and need to be replaced.
When first powered ON, the printer detects any jammed
paper. The movement of paper through the printer is
constantly being monitored by the printer’s controllers.
When the printer detects a misfeed or a paper jam, the
printing process is halted, and the Control Panel message
Open Cover
Clear Paper Path
is displayed. This message indicates that a jam was detected
in the printer. The entire paper path should be checked each
time a paper jam is cleared.
After the paper jam has been cleared, the printer will resume
operation to complete the print job.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r J a m s
The paper path is depicted in Figure 7.3. (The figure includes
the optional lower base.)
Figure 7.3 Printer paper path
The following section provides detailed step-by-step
procedures for clearing paper jams as well as some tips to
help troubleshoot reoccurring jams.
7-20 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r J a m s
Clearing Paper
Jams from the
Standard Tray or
Lower Base
If the MP Tray is
1
installed, remove it
before opening the
Front Cover.
Open the front cover
by pressing down on
the release latches on
both sides of the front
cover.
2
The area inside the
printer near the fuser
may be hot.
!
Caution
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r J a m s
Remove any paper
visible in the paper
transportation area
inside the printer by
gently pulling it
upward.
3
Paper removed from this
area may have unfused
toner on it which will soil
your hand or clothing if
touched.
!
Caution
Remove any paper
entering the fuser
4
area by gently pulling
the paper toward the
front of the printer.
If paper is well into the
fuser, it can be removed
by pulling the jammed
sheet toward the rear of
the printer. See Step 5.
Note
7-22 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r J a m s
Remove any paper
5
exiting the fuser area
by gently pulling it
toward the rear of the
printer.
Close the Front Cover.
6
When the Lower Base is in
use when a jam occurs,
the standard tray may
need to be removed to
clear a paper jam. Check
for paper that may be
jammed between the
Lower Base and the
Note
standard tray slot.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r J a m s
Remove the paper
tray(s) in use and
remove any paper that
may have been misfed
out of the paper
tray(s).
7
Ensure that the paper
is loaded correctly into
the tray(s) with the
lead edges under the
metal corners tabs.
8
If a universal tray is
being used, ensure that
the paper guides are
adjusted against the
paper stock. See
“Loading the Standard
or Lower Paper Tray”
(page 2-14).
7-24 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P a p e r J a m s
Clearing Paper
Jams from the
MP tray
When the multi-purpose (MP) tray is being used and
a jam occurs, remove all the paper in the tray.
1
Remove any paper that has partially fed into the MP
slot.
2
Remove the MP tray.
3
Open the front cover and remove any paper that is in
the paper transport areas. See “Clearing Paper Jams
from the Standard Tray or Lower Base” (page 7-21),
Steps 1 through 5, to assure all paper has been
removed from the paper path.
4
Close the front cover.
5
6
7
Reinstall the MP tray.
Reload paper stock into the MP tray.
Regardless of where the paper is jammed, you must open
and close the Front Cover to clear the “Open Cover Clear
Paper Path” Control Panel message.
Note
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.4 lists common operational problems and
recommended actions.
Printer
Operational
Problems
Figure 7.4 Printer Operational Problems
Problem
Action
Printer will not print
1. Power printer OFF, then ON.
2. Print a Configuration Sheet (see page 3-62).
•
If Configuration Sheet prints, printer is OK. Check your software
application and your printer connection. See below.
•
If Configuration Sheet does not print, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
A file sent from the host
does not print
1. Check if printer is Online.
2. Send a plain text file (i.e., one without printing commands embedded in it) to
the printer. (You may need to depress the form feed key when the LED
remains lit if Auto Job End is not set.)
•
If file prints correctly in the default font, with all of the characters in the
original file, the printer is seeing the same data that the host is sending,
and the interface or communication line is functioning correctly.
•
If no data prints (or the last page indicator does not come on):
A. Check configuration to be certain the printer is configured properly.
B. If using the parallel or serial port, the port may be disabled on the
printer. Check the Configuration Sheet for the port you are using to
see if Port Enable is ON. If OFF, set to ON and try again.
C. If using an optional Xerox network interface card (XNIC) (i.e.,
Ethernet, LocalTalk, or Token Ring), check the Configuration Sheet
to see if the printer is acknowledging that the XNIC is present. (Refer
to XNIC installation instructions packaged with the option.)
–
If the XNIC is not acknowledged, power OFF printer and
unplug. Pull out controller board, remove the XNIC and check
that connector pins are not bent. If bent, straighten. Reseat the
XNIC securely, put controller board back in printer, power ON
and print Configuration Sheet. If XNIC is still not
acknowledged, the XNIC has failed. Contact your dealer or
Xerox / Rank Xerox.
–
If the XNIC is acknowledged, check if printer is recognized by
the host. (Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter of the
respective XNIC installation guide.)
7-26 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.4 Printer Operational Problems (continued)
Problem
Action
D. If garbled data, check Configuration Sheet to confirm that the
correct emulation is selected or Language Sensing is ON. Also, check
that data transfer matches host configuration (i.e., Transfer Rate,
Baud Rate, Handshake, Data Bits, etc.). If not, correct configuration
on printer and try again.
A printed page does not
look like it should
1. Make certain that the software application you are using to create your print
job is configured properly. Refer to your software documentation.
2. Send a file containing PCL or PostScript commands to the printer.
•
If your page prints as it should, your printer and interface are functioning
properly.
•
If your information prints correctly, but doesn’t look right, you may have:
–
–
–
–
An error in your command sequence/operator
A missing downloaded font
A mismatched printer option against your host formatting
A missing or misaligned font card
•
Command errors may be identified by looking at your input file or by
using the Hex Dump feature on the printer. You can determine which
fonts are in the system by printing a PCL or PS Font List. And you can
verify your data setup by printing a Configuration Sheet and checking
your printer setup.
In a job, a requested font, 1. Print a PCL Font List (See Chapter 3.)
which is on a font card,
does not print
•
If your requested fonts print on the Font List, your print job may need
correcting.
•
If your requested fonts do not print on the Font List, power the printer
OFF, remove and reinstall the font card. Power the printer back ON, and
print another PCL Font List.
•
If font card is still not being recognized, try another slot or font card,
then print another Font List.
–
If a different font slot works, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox to correct the defective slot.
–
If a new font card is recognized, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox about replacing the defective card.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.4 Printer Operational Problems (continued)
Problem
Action
The text printed is a
listing of the PostScript
commands instead of
the PostScript job
1. Make certain that the software application you are using to create your job is
configured properly. Refer to your software documentation.
2. If Language Sensing is set to OFF, make certain that the System Language
setting for the port you are using is set to PostScript. See the “Interface Menu
Hierarchy” (page 3-37).
3. If Language Sensing is set to ON, the job sent to the printer might have
included an incorrect header and therefore not have indicated that a
PostScript Job was being sent.
•
Set System Language to PostScript in the appropriate Interface Menu (i.e.
Parallel, Serial, etc.) and try sending the job again.
•
Check your software to make sure the PostScript header file is being sent
to the printer.
A legal document prints
but the edges are cut off
1. Set Page Protection to Legal. If page is still being clipped, more memory needs
to be installed.
A PostScript job fails to
print
1. Check the configuration and be certain the proper emulation is selected; also
check the configuration of your printer driver configuration.
2. If Language Sensing is set to ON, set System Language to PostScript in the
appropriate Interface Menu (i.e. Parallel, Serial, etc.) and resend the job.
3. Set Print Errors to ON and resend job.
•
•
•
If error page prints, this means that there is a problem in the PostScript
coding. Correct the coding problem and resend the job.
If job does not print and no error page was printed, set Page Protection
to OFF.
If job still does not print, this job may require additional memory.
7-28 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5 lists common print quality problems, the likely
cause, and recommended actions.
Print Quality
Problems
Figure 7.5 Print Quality Problems
Problem
Possible Causes
Corrective Actions
Light/faint prints
1. Toner level low/empty
1. Replace EP cartridge.
2. Print Density adjustment set
too low
2. Adjust Print Density (see Chapter 6).
Overall image is lighter
than normal.
3. Damp paper stock
3. Replace paper stock.
4. Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
4. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Blank Prints
1. Defective EP cartridge
1. Replace EP cartridge.
2. No printable data received
from computer
2. Produce a Test Print (see Chapter 6). If
the Test Print is normal, check the
following:
Entire printed page is
blank with no visible
print.
•
Interface cable between computer
and printer
•
Printer set up and application
software
If the Test Print is blank, contact your
dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5 Print Quality Problems (continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Corrective Actions
Background/black
prints
1. Defective EP cartridge
1. Replace EP cartridge.
2. Print Density adjustment set
too high
2. Adjust Print Density (see Chapter 6).
Overall darkness or
localized dark bands in
the non-image areas.
3. Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
3. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
4. Defective Laser, Controller,
Fuser Assembly
4. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox
Spot deletions
1. Damp paper stock
1. Replace paper stock.
2. Replace EP cartridge.
2. Defective EP cartridge
Areas of the print are
extremely light or
missing.
3. Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
3. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
7-30 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5 Print Quality Problems (continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Corrective Actions
Vertical line deletions
1. Defective EP cartridge
1. Replace EP cartridge.
2. Replace paper stock.
2. Defective paper stock,
creases, folds, etc.
Localized print deletions
forming narrow lines
running in the direction
of paper movement.
3. Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
3. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Horizontal line
deletions
1. Defective EP cartridge
1. Replace EP cartridge.
2. Replace paper stock.
2. Defective paper stock,
creases, folds, etc.
Localized print deletions
appearing as bands
running across the page
perpendicular to the
direction of paper
movement.
3. Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
3. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5 Print Quality Problems (continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Corrective Actions
Vertical dark streaks
1. Defective EP cartridge
1. Replace EP cartridge.
2. Contaminated paper path
2. Clean paper path to remove any toner
accumulations.
Black lines running across
the print in the direction
of paper movement.
3. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
3. Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
Horizontal dark streaks 1. Defective EP cartridge
1. Replace EP cartridge.
2. Contaminated paper path
2. Clean paper path to remove any toner
accumulations.
Black lines running across
the page perpendicular
to the direction of paper
movement.
3. Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
3. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
7-32 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5 Print Quality Problems (continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Corrective Actions
Dark spots/marks
1. Defective EP cartridge
1. Replace EP cartridge.
2. Contaminated paper path
2. Clean paper path to remove any toner
accumulations.
3. Contaminated Bias Transfer
Roll
3. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Residual image
1. Defective EP cartridge
1. Replace EP cartridge.
If problem is not resolved, contact your
dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Ghost images of
previous pages is
produced along with the
current page.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5 Print Quality Problems (continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Corrective Actions
Unfused or partially
fused image
1. Damp paper stock
1. Replace paper stock.
2. Heavy or unusual paper stock
2. Refer to Chapter 2 for printer
throughput capabilities.
The printed image is not
fully fused to the paper
and easily rubs off.
3. Light image density
3. Replace EP cartridge.
4. Defective Fuser Module
4. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Skewed prints
1. Paper improperly loaded into
paper tray
1. Check trays for proper paper loading
(see Chapter 2).
Printed image is not
parallel to the edge of
the paper.
2. Obstructed paper path
3. Contaminated paper path
4. Dirty/worn Paper Feed Rolls
2. Inspect paper path for obstructions
(torn pieces of paper, etc.).
3. Inspect/clean paper path to remove
residual toner and paper dust.
4. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
7-34 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5 Print Quality Problems (continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Corrective Actions
Image misregistration
1. Paper improperly loaded into
paper tray
1. Check trays for proper paper loading
(see Chapter 2).
The printed image is
mispositioned on the
page.
2. Wrong paper size for
application
2. Check paper stock and printer
configuration.
3. If problem is not resolved, contact your
dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
Produce a Test Print (see Chapter 3)
•
•
Fold and crease the Test Print as shown.
Both horizontal and vertical folds
should fall within plus or minus two
lines.
If the pattern registers OK, the problem may
be in your software application.
Damaged prints
1. Poor paper condition
1. Inspect/replace paper stock.
2. Paper improperly loaded into
paper tray
2. Check trays for proper paper loading
Prints are wrinkled,
creased, or torn.
(see Chapter 2).
3. Obstructed paper path
3. Inspect paper path for obstructions
(torn pieces of paper, etc.).
4. Defective Fuser Module
4. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
❖
7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s
Figure 7.5 Print Quality Problems (continued)
Problem
Possible Causes
Corrective Actions
TrueRes Smoothing
problems
TrueRes Smoothing is a
technology that smooths
the jagged edges of
curved or near
vertical/horizontal lines.
Produce Test Prints (see
Chapter 3) with TrueRes
switched both ON and
OFF. Inspect the TrueRes
target on the Test Print.
If:
1. TrueRes is not
functional (no
1. Failed Controller.
1. Replace Controller.
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
apparent difference
between ON and
OFF setting)
2. TrueRes appears
excessively dark:
2. Print Density set to dark/light. 2. Adjust Print Density (see Chapter 6).
or
TrueRes appears
insufficient
7-36 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Printer and Cable
Specifications
A x idneppA
4505 and 4505ps Printer Specifications ............................. A-2
4510 and 4510ps Printer Specifications ............................. A-4
Cable Specifications ............................................................. A-7
Parallel Interface A-7
RS-232C Serial Interface (CCITT V.24) A-10
Data Rates A-10
Encoding A-10
Protocols A-10
Connections A-10
RS-422A Serial Interface (CCITT V.11 and X.27) A-12
Data Rates A-12
Encoding A-12
Protocols A-12
Connections A-12
Null Modem A-14
Network Interface A-14
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 5 0 5 a n d 4 5 0 5 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
4505 and
4505ps Printer
Specifications
Imaging method Electro-Photography
Exposure system Semiconductor laser beam (laser diode) scanning
Image resolution 600 x 600 dpi and 300 x 300 dpi
Warm up time Less than 60 seconds after power on
Continuous print speed 5 ppm (pages per minute)
Processor 16 MHz AMD 29200 RISC
Maximum Monthly Duty Cycle Up to 10,000 prints
Nominal voltage 220/240 V
110/115 V
Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption Less than 450 W during operation; power saver mode operational after
10 minutes of not printing
Noise level Less than 45 dB during operation and warm-up; less than 40 dB in
standby
Temperature 5°C / 41°F to 35°C / 95°F during operation
Humidity 15% to 85% during operation
Dimensions 35.2 x 39.4 x 25.3 cm
13.9 x 15.5 x 10 inches
Weight 12 Kgs / 26.5 lbs
Maximum memory capacity 16 MB
A-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 5 0 5 a n d 4 5 0 5 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Factory-provided features 2 MB printer memory
One 250-sheet universal paper tray
Multipurpose (MP) paper tray
EP (electronic printing) cartridge
Power cord (110 volt printers only)
Document Services for Printing software diskettes
User documentation
On the 4505ps printer:
Additional 4 MB SIMM (for a total of 6 MB)
PostScript option
Options 4 MB SIMM
16 MB SIMM
250-sheet Base with universal tray
500-sheet Base with A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) tray
Paper trays (in a variety of sizes)
PostScript kit
Ethernet network interface card (XNIC-E’NET)
LocalTalk network interface card (XNIC-L’TALK)
Token Ring network interface card (XNIC-T’RING)
PCL font cards
See Appendix D for information about ordering options.
Note
Printable Area See Figure A.1 (page A-6) for printable area dimensions. (The printer
cannot print outside the printable area.)
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 5 1 0 a n d 4 5 1 0 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
4510 and
4510ps Printer
Specifications
Imaging method Electro-Photography
Exposure system Semiconductor laser beam (laser diode) scanning
Image resolution 600 x 600 dpi and 300 x 300 dpi
Warm up time Less than 60 seconds after power on
Continuous print speed 10 ppm (pages per minute)
Processor 20 MHz AMD 29200 RISC
Maximum Monthly Duty Cycle Up to 20,000 prints
Nominal voltage 220/240 V
110/115 V
Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption Less than 450 W during operation; power saver mode operational after
10 minutes of not printing
Noise level Less than 50 dB during operation and warm-up; less than 40 dB in
standby
Temperature 5°C / 41°F to 35°C / 95°F during operation
Humidity 15% to 85% during operation
Dimensions 35.2 x 39.4 x 25.4 cm
13.9 x 15.5 x 10 inches
Weight 14.0 Kgs / 31 lbs
Maximum memory capacity 16 MB
A-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 5 1 0 a n d 4 5 1 0 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Factory-provided features 2 MB printer memory
One 250-sheet universal paper tray
Multipurpose (MP) paper tray
EP (electronic printing) cartridge
Power cord (110 volt printers only)
Document Services for Printing software diskettes
User documentation
On the 4510ps printer:
Additional 4 MB SIMM (for a total of 6 MB)
PostScript option
Options 4 MB SIMM
16 MB SIMM
250-sheet Base with universal tray
500-sheet Base with A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) tray
Paper trays (in a variety of sizes)
PostScript kit
Ethernet network interface card (XNIC-E’NET)
LocalTalk network interface card (XNIC-L’TALK)
Token Ring network interface card (XNIC-T’RING)
PCL font cards
See Appendix D for information about ordering options.
Note
Printable Area See Figure A.1 (page A-6) for printable area dimensions. (The printer
cannot print outside the printable area.)
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 5 1 0 a n d 4 5 1 0 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Figure A.1 PCL and PostScript printable area dimensions
Printable Area
Width
Printable Area
Length
Printer Language
PCL
Paper Size
All paper sizes
Determined by the
formula: W – 8.5 mm
(or W – .33 inch) where
Determined by the
formula: L – 8.5 mm
(or L – .33 inch) where
W = physical paper width L = physical paper width
PostScript
A4
200 mm
289 mm
7.89 inches
11.36 inches
8.5 x 11 (Letter)
Executive
8.5 x 14 (Legal)
Com-10
DL
207 mm
8.11 inches
271 mm
10.67 inches
175 mm
6.93 inches
258 mm
10.17 inches
207 mm
8.11 inches
347 mm
13.67 inches
96 mm
3.73 inches
233 mm
9.17 inches
100 mm
212 mm
3.95 inches
8.33 inches
Monarch
Folio
89 mm
3.52 inches
182 mm
7.17 inches
207 mm
347 mm
8.11 inches
12.67 inches
A5
141 mm
200 mm
5.55 inches
7.89 inches
B5 (ISO)
C5
167 mm
6.61 inches
241 mm
9.53 inches
154 mm
220 mm
6.08 inches
8.68 inches
A-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Figure A.2 shows parallel and serial interface information to
help you obtain the correct printer cable.
Cable
Specifications
Figure A.2 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps parallel and serial cable characteristics
Communication
Protocol
Printer Connector
Type
Type
Commonly Used for
Standard Centronics
Parallel† Cable
Most PC systems today
Bidirectional
(Centronics standard)
36-pin male
Standard Serial‡ Cable
PCs and modems
RS-232C
or
25-pin male
RS-422A
† Xerox has certified Parallel cables with these printers at a maximum of 6 feet.
‡ Xerox has certified Serial cables with these printers at a maximum of 4 feet.
Parallel Interface
Today most single-user computer systems (IBM PC and
compatibles) utilize the parallel interface because it allows
more data at a time to be transferred from the computer to the
printer than does a serial interface. If the printer is not
connected to a network, printing through the parallel
interface is most desirable.
The printers support a bidirectional parallel port, compatible
with the IEEE standard 1284-B, with forward transfer rates of
100 KBytes or 1 MBytes.
The FAULT signal (pin no. 32) goes true (low) under the
following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
Off-line mode selected
Cover open (interlock open)
Paper out
Paper jam
Any machine fault
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
The FAULT signal goes false (high) when all the above
conditions are corrected.
The Centronics bidirectional parallel interface is designed to
provide plug-to-plug compatibility with a 36 pin Amphenol
57-40360 (or equivalent) connector that connects to an
Amphenol 57-30360 (or equivalent) connector. The cable
length has been certified at 6 feet, and will be the twisted pair
type 22AWG -15 pairs. Pin assignment and functions for the
Centronics interface are designated in Figure A.3.
Figure A.3 Centronics connector pin assignment
Signal
Signal Name
Source
Function
Pin #
1
/STROBE
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
/ACK
HOST
Host Check
Data Bit 0
2
3
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
BIDIRECTIONAL
PRINTER
Data Bit 1
4
Data Bit 2
5
Data Bit 3
6
Data Bit 4
7
Data Bit 5
8
Data Bit 6
9
Data Bit 7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Printer Acknowledge
Printer Busy
Out of Paper
Printer Select
Host Busy
BUSY
PRINTER
PE
PRINTER
SELECT
/AUTOFEED
N/C
PRINTER
HOST
- - - - - -
Not Defined
Logic GND
Chassis GND
GND
GND
A-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Figure A.3 Centronics connector pin assignment (continued)
Signal
Pin #
Signal Name
Source
Function
18
+ 5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
/INIT
PRINTER
Printer Logic High
Signal GND (/Strobe)
Signal GND (Data 0)
Signal GND (Data 1)
Signal GND (Data 2)
Signal GND (Data 3)
Signal GND (Data 4)
Signal GND (Data 5)
Signal GND (Data 6)
Signal GND (Data 7)
Signal Ground (PE, SELECT, /ACK)
Signal Ground (BUSY, /FAULT)
Signal Ground (AUTOFEED, /SELECTIN, /INIT)
Reset Signal
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
HOST
PRINTER
- - - - - -
HOST
32
/FAULT
N/C
Machine Status
33 - 35
36
Not Defined
/SELECTIN
Select Input
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
The RS-232C Serial Interface complies with the EIA 232C
standard which defines the interconnect of Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication Equipment
(DCE).
RS-232C Serial
Interface
(CCITT V.24)
Data Rates
The user may select line speeds of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200 and 38400 baud. Default setting is for 9600 baud.
Encoding
Asynchronous communication in the printers supports 7 or
8-bit ASCII data. The string of data bits is encapsulated by 1
Start bit, 1 or 2 Stop bits and may have an appended Parity
bit. Parity (even, odd or none), the number of stop bits and 7
or 8 bit data are selectable from the front panel UI. Default
settings are for 8 bit data with 1 stop bit and parity none.
Protocols
Character protocols are used to regulate the flow of
information between machine and host. The software
handshaking protocol of XON/XOFF, Robust XON/XOFF,
and DTR Polarity are available – DTR provides the hardware
handshaking. The default setting is for Robust XON/XOFF.
Connections
The connector for the RS-232 interface is the 25 pin “D” Shell
type. The use of short cables for interconnect is
recommended. Cable length has been certified at 4 feet.
A-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
The interface signals and their associated pin assignments
are identified in the Figure A.4.
Figure A.4 Pin assignment for RS-232C
RS-232C
Function
Signal Name
Pin #
Direction
Chassis GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND
- - - - - -
From Printer
To Printer
From Printer
To Printer
To Printer
- - - - - -
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
Data
Data
Control
Control
Control
GND
Data Set Ready
Signal GND
Carrier Detect
N/C
Control
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Control
- - - - - -
To Printer
- - - - - -
9, 10, 12
Send Data Noninverted
Receive Data Noninverted
Send Data inverted
N/C
11
13
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
14
- - - - - -
15, 17 – 19
16
- - - - - -
Receive Data Inverted
Data Terminal Ready
N/C
- - - - - -
20
From Printer
- - - - - -
21 – 25
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
The RS-422A Serial Interface is hardware compatible with
the EIA RS-422 standard which defines the interconnect of
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication
Equipment (DCE).
RS-422A Serial
Interface (CCITT
V.11 and X.27)
Data Rates
The user may select line speeds of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200 and 38400 baud. Default setting is for 9600 baud.
Encoding
Asynchronous communication in the printers supports 7 or
8-bit ASCII data. The string of data bits is encapsulated by 1
Start bit, 1 or 2 Stop bits and may have an appended Parity
bit. Parity (even, odd or none), the number of stop bits and 7
or 8 bit data are selectable from the front panel UI. Default
settings are for 8 bit data with 1 stop bit and parity none.
Protocols
XON/XOFF provides the software handshaking on the
RS-422 interface. Robust XON/XOFF is the default.
Connections
The connector for the RS-422A interface is the 25 pin “D”
Shell type. The use of short cables for interconnect is
recommended. Cable length has been certified at 4 feet.
A-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
The interface signals and their associated pin assignments
are identified in the Figure A.5.
Figure A.5 Pin assignment for RS-422A
RS-422A
Function
Signal Name
Pin #
Direction
Chassis GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GND
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
GND
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request to Send
Clear to Send
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Data Set Ready
Signal GND
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Carrier Detect
N/C
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Data
- - - - - -
9, 10, 12
- - - - - -
Send Data Noninverted
Receive Data Noninverted
Send Data inverted
N/C
11
13
From Printer
To Printer
From Printer
- - - - - -
Data
14
Data
15, 17 – 19
16
- - - - - -
Data
Receive Data Inverted
Data Terminal Ready
N/C
To Printer
- - - - - -
20
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
21 – 25
- - - - - -
A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
A null modem is a device that eliminates both a modem and a
telephone line. When the printers are used with an
Null Modem
asynchronous serial interface connected to a DTE host (such
as a PC-compatible), a modem, modem eliminator, or a null
modem is required. Figure A.6 shows null modem wiring.
Figure A.6 Null Modem wiring
Network Interface Network interface communication is the most common for
enabling multiple users to print from a host system.
For network interface cables, refer to your network software
documentation.
A-14 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Printer Commands
(Escape Sequences)
B
x idneppA
Xerox-Unique Settings ......................................................... B-2
PCL Printer Commands ......................................................... B-3
HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands ................................. B-21
Control Codes ..................................................................... B-25
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X e r o x - U n i q u e S e t t i n g s
B-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
PCL printer commands—also called escape sequences—are
used by software applications to control how fonts and
graphics are printed on the page. Figure B.1 lists the PCL
printer commands for the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps
printers.
PCL Printer
Commands
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
JOB CONTROL COMMANDS
Reset
E
Universal Exit
Language (ULE)
—
—
C%-12345X 027 037 045 049 050
1B 25 2D 31 32 33 34 35
58
051 052 053 088
E
Reset
CE
027 069
1B 45
E
E
Number Of
Copies
# of Copies
C&l#X
027 038 108 # ... # 088
1B 26 6C # ... # 58
Long Edge (Left) # of Decipoints
Offset
Registration
C&l#U
C&l#Z
C&u#D
027 038 108 # ... # 085
027 038 108 # ... # 090
027 038 117 # ... # 068
1B 26 6C # ... # 55
1B 26 6C # ... # 5A
1B 26 75 # ... # 44
(1/720”)
E
E
Short Edge
(Top) Offset
Registration
# of Decipoints
(1/720”)
Unit Of
Measure
# = Number of
units per inch
PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS
Page Length and Size
E
Paper Source
Eject Page
C&l0H
C&l1H
027 038 108 048 072
1B 26 6C 30 48
1B 26 6C 31 48
E
Main Paper
027 038 108 049 072
Source (Standard)
E
E
Manual Feed (MP)
C&l2H
C&l3H
027 038 108 050 072
027 038 108 051 072
1B 26 6C 32 48
1B 26 6C 33 48
Manual Envelope
Feed (MP)
E
Alternate Paper
Source (Lower)
C&l4H
027 038 108 052 072
1B 26 6C 34 48
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
027 038 108 049 065
027 038 108 050 065
027 038 108 051 065
Hexadecimal Value
1B 26 6C 31 41
E
Page Size
Executive
C&l1A
C&l2A
C&l3A
C&l26A
E
E
E
Letter
Legal
A4
1B 26 6C 32 41
1B 26 6C 33 41
027 038 108 050 054
065
1B 26 6C 32 36 41
E
A5
C&l70A
027 038 108 050 048
048 048 065
1B 26 6C 32 30 30 30 41
1B 26 6C 33 30 30 31 41
1B 26 6C 38 30 41
Folio
EC&l71A
027 038 108 051 048
048 049 065
E
Monarch
COM 10
DL
C&l80A
027 038 108 056 048
065
E
C&l81A
027 038 108 056 049
065
1B 26 6C 38 31 41
E
C&l90A
027 038 108 057 048
065
1B 26 6C 39 30 41
E
C5
C&l91A
027 038 108 057 049
065
1B 26 6C 39 31 41
E
B5 (ISO)
C&l100A
027 038 108 049 048
048 065
1B 26 6C 31 30 30 41
1B 26 6C #...# 050
E
Page Length
Orientation
# of Lines
(5-128)
C&l#P
027 038 108 #...# 080
Orientation
E
E
E
E
Portrait
C&l0O
C&l1O
C&l2O
027 038 108 048 079
027 038 108 049 079
027 038 108 050 079
027 038 108 051 079
027 038 097 # ... # 080
1B 26 6C 30 4F
1B 26 6C 31 4F
1B 26 6C 32 4F
1B 26 6C 33 4F
1B 26 61 # ... # 50
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape C&l3O
E
Print Direction
# Degrees of
Rotation
C&a#P
(counter-
clockwise. 90°
increments only)
B-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
Margins and Text Length
E
Top Margin
Text Length
Left Margin
Right Margin
# of Lines
C&l#E
C&l#F
C&a#L
C&a#M
C9
027 038 108 # ... # 069
1B 26 6C # ... # 45
1B 26 6C # ... # 46
1B 26 61 # ... # 4C
1B 26 61 # ... # 4D
1B 39
E
E
E
E
# of Lines
# of Columns
# of Columns
—
027 038 108 # ... # 070
027 038 097 # ... # 076
027 038 097 # ... # 077
027 057
Clear
Horizontal
Margins
Perforation Skip Mode
E
E
Perforation Skip Disable
Enable
C&l0L
C&l1L
027 038 108 048 076
027 038 108 049 076
1B 26 6C 30 4C
1B 26 6C 31 4C
Horizontal Column Spacing
E
Horizontal
Motion Index
(HMI)
# of 1/120”
Increments
C&k#H
027 038 107 # ... # 072
1B 26 6B # ... # 48
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
Vertical Line Spacing
E
Vertical Motion
Index (VMI)
# of 1/48”
C&l#C
027 038 108 # ... # 067
1B 26 6C # ... # 43
Increments
1 line/inch
2 lines/inch
3 lines/inch
4 lines/inch
6 lines/inch
8 lines/inch
12 lines/inch
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
Line Spacing
(Lines per inch)
C&l1D
C&l2D
C&l3D
C&l4D
C&l6D
C&l8D
C&l12D
027 038 108 049 068
027 038 108 050 068
027 038 108 051 068
027 038 108 052 068
027 038 108 054 068
027 038 108 056 068
1B 26 6C 31 44
1B 26 6C 32 44
1B 26 6C 33 44
1B 26 6C 34 44
1B 26 6C 36 44
1B 26 6C 38 44
1B 26 6C 31 32 44
027 038 108 049 050
068
E
E
E
16 lines/inch
24 lines/inch
48 lines/inch
C&l16D
C&l24D
C&l48D
027 038 108 049 054
068
1B 26 6C 31 36 44
1B 26 6C 32 34 44
1B 26 6C 34 38 44
027 038 108 050 052
068
027 038 108 052 056
068
CURSOR POSITIONING
Vertical and Horizontal
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
Vertical Position # of Rows
# of Units
C&a#R
C*p#Y
C&a#V
C&a#C
C*p#X
C&a#H
027 038 097 # ... # 082
1B 26 61 # ... # 52
1B 2A 70 # ... # 59
1B 26 61 # ... # 56
1B 26 61 # ... # 43
1B 2A 70 # ... # 58
1B 26 61 # ... # 48
1B 3D
027 042 112 # ... # 089
027 038 097 # ... # 086
027 038 097 # ... # 067
027 042 112 # ... # 088
027 038 097 # ... # 072
027 061
# of Decipoints
Horizontal
Position
# of Columns
# of Units
# of Decipoints
Half Line Feed
=
C
B-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
End-of-Line Termination
E
Line
Termination
CR=CR; LF=LF;
FF=FF
C&k0G
C&k1G
C&k2G
027 038 107 048 071
027 038 107 049 071
027 038 107 050 071
1B 26 6B 30 47
1B 26 6B 31 47
1B 26 6B 32 47
E
E
CR=CR+LF;
LF=LF; FF=FF
CR=CR;
LF=CR+LF;
FF=CR+FF
E
CR=CR+LF;
LF=CR+LF;
FF=CR+FF
C&k3G
027 038 107 051 071
1B 26 6B 33 47
Push/Pop Position
E
E
Push/Pop
Position
Push
Pop
C&f0S
C&f1S
027 038 102 048 083
027 038 102 049 083
1B 26 66 30 53
1B 26 66 31 53
FONT SELECTION
Symbol Set Selection
E
E
E
Primary Symbol
Set
ISO 60:
Norwegian 1
C(0D
027 040 048 068
027 040 049 069
027 040 057 069
1B 28 30 44
1B 28 31 45
1B 28 39 45
ISO 4: United
Kingdom
C(1E
C(9E
Windows 3.1
Latin 2
E
E
E
E
ISO 69: French
ISO 21: German
ISO 15: Italian
C(1F
C(1G
C(0I
027 040 049 070
027 040 049 071
027 040 048 073
027 040 054 074
1B 28 31 46
1B 28 31 47
1B 28 30 49
1B 28 36 4A
Microsoft
Publishing
C(6J
E
E
DeskTop
PS Text
C(7J
027 040 055 074
1B 28 37 4A
C(10J
027 040 049 048 074
1B 28 31 30 4A
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
027 040 049 050 074
027 040 049 051 074
Hexadecimal Value
1B 28 31 32 4A
E
MC Text
C(12J
C(13J
E
Ventura
1B 28 31 33 4A
International
E
E
Ventura US
Wingdings
C(14J
027 040 049 052 074
1B 28 31 34 4A
C(579L
027 040 053 055 057
076
1B 28 35 37 39 4C
E
E
E
E
E
PS Math
C(5M
C(6M
C(8M
C(19M
C(0N
027 040 053 077
027 040 054 077
027 040 056 077
027 040 049 057 077
027 040 048 078
1B 28 35 4D
1B 28 36 4D
1B 28 38 4D
1B 28 31 39 4D
1B 28 30 4E
Ventura Math
Math-8
Symbol
ISO 8859-1
(ECMA-94) Latin 1
E
E
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
C(2N
027 040 050 078
027 040 053 078
027 040 048 083
027 040 050 083
027 040 053 084
1B 28 32 4E
1B 28 35 4E
1B 28 30 53
1B 28 32 53
1B 28 35 54
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 C(5N
E
ISO 11: Swedish
ISO 17: Spanish
C(0S
C(2S
C(5T
E
E
Windows 3.1
Latin 5
E
E
E
E
E
PC Turkish
ISO 6: ASCII
Legal
C(9T
C(0U
C(1U
C(8U
C(9U
027 040 057 084
027 040 048 085
027 040 049 085
027 040 056 085
027 040 057 085
1B 28 39 54
1B 28 30 55
1B 28 31 55
1B 28 38 55
1B 28 39 55
Roman-8
Windows 3.0
Latin 1
E
E
E
PC-8
C(10U
C(11U
C(12U
027 040 049 048 085
027 040 049 049 085
027 040 049 050 085
1B 28 31 30 55
1B 28 31 31 55
1B 28 31 32 55
PC-8 D/N
PC 850
B-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function Parameter Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
1B 28 31 35 55
E
Pi Font
C(15U
C(17U
C(19U
027 040 049 053 085
027 040 049 055 085
027 040 049 057 085
E
E
PC-852
1B 28 31 37 55
Windows 3.1
Latin 1 (ANSI)
1B 28 31 39 55
Spacing
E
E
Primary Spacing Fixed
Proportional
C(s0P
C(s1P
027 040 115 048 080
027 040 115 049 080
1B 28 73 30 50
1B 28 73 31 50
Pitch
E
E
E
Primary Pitch
# Characters/inch
10.0
C(s#H
C&k0S
C&k2S
027 040 115 # ... # 072
027 038 107 048 083
027 038 107 050 083
1B 28 73 # ... # 48
1B 26 6B 30 53
1B 26 6B 32 53
Set Pitch Mode
Compressed
(16.5-16.7)
E
E
Elite (12.0)
C&k4S
C(s#V
027 038 107 052 083
1B 26 6B 34 53
Point Size
Primary Height
Primary Style
# Points
027 040 115 # ... # 086
1B 28 73 # ... # 56
Style
E
E
E
E
E
Upright (Solid)
Italic
C(s0S
C(s1S
C(s4S
C(s5S
C(s8S
027 040 115 048 083
027 040 115 049 083
027 040 115 052 083
027 040 115 053 083
027 040 115 056 083
1B 28 73 30 53
1B 28 73 31 53
1B 28 73 34 53
1B 28 73 35 53
1B 28 73 38 53
Condensed
Condensed Italic
Compressed(Extra
Condensed)
E
E
Expanded
C(s24S
C(s32S
027 040 115 050 052
083
1B 28 73 32 34 53
1B 28 73 33 32 53
Outline
027 040 115 051 050
083
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
E
Inline
C(s64S
027 040 115 054 052
083
1B 28 73 36 34 53
E
E
Shadowed
C(s128S
C(s160S
027 040 115 049 050
056 083
1B 28 73 31 32 38 53
1B 28 73 31 36 30 53
Outline Shadowed
027 040 115 049 054
048 083
Stroke Weight
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
Primary Font
Stroke Weight
Ultra Thin
Extra Thin
Thin
C(s-7B
C(s-6B
C(s-5B
C(s-4B
C(s-3B
C(s-2B
C(s-1B
C(s0B
027 040 115 045 055
066
1B 28 73 2D 37 42
1B 28 73 2D 36 42
1B 28 73 2D 35 42
1B 28 73 2D 34 42
1B 28 73 2D 33 42
1B 28 73 2D 32 42
1B 28 73 2D 31 42
1B 28 73 30 42
027 040 115 045 054
066
027 040 115 045 053
066
Extra Light
Light
027 040 115 045 052
066
027 040 115 045 051
066
Demi Light
Semi Light
027 040 115 045 050
066
027 040 115 045 049
066
Medium (book or
text)
027 040 115 048 066
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
Semi Bold
Demi Bold
Bold
C(s1B
C(s2B
C(s3B
C(s4B
C(s5B
C(s6B
C(s7B
027 040 115 049 066
027 040 115 050 066
027 040 115 051 066
027 040 115 052 066
027 040 115 053 066
027 040 115 054 066
027 040 115 055 066
1B 28 73 31 42
1B 28 73 32 42
1B 28 73 33 42
1B 28 73 34 42
1B 28 73 35 42
1B 28 73 36 42
1B 28 73 37 42
Extra Bold
Black
Extra Black
Ultra Black
B-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
Primary Typeface Family
E
Typeface Family LinePrinter
Albertus
C(s0T
027 040 115 048 084
1B 28 73 30 54
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
C(s4362T
027 040 115 052 051
054 050 084
1B 28 73 34 33 36 32 54
Antique Olive
Clarendon
Coronet
C(s4168T
C(s4140T
C(s4116T
C(s4099T
C(s4197T
C(s4102T
C(s4297T
C(s4113T
C(s4101T
C(s4148T
C(s16602T
C(s16901T
C(s16686T
027 040 115 052 049
054 056 084
1B 28 73 34 31 36 38 54
1B 28 73 34 31 34 30 54
1B 28 73 34 31 31 36 54
1B 28 73 34 30 39 39 54
1B 28 73 34 31 39 37 54
1B 28 73 34 31 30 32 54
1B 28 73 34 32 39 37 54
1B 28 73 34 31 31 33 54
1B 28 73 34 31 30 31 54
1B 28 73 34 31 34 38 54
027 040 115 052 049
052 048 084
027 040 115 052 049
049 054 084
Courier
027 040 115 052 048
057 057 084
Garamond
Antiqua
027 040 115 052 049
057 055 084
Letter Gothic
Marigold
CG Omega
CG Times
Univers
027 040 115 052 049
048 050 084
027 040 115 052 050
057 055 084
027 040 115 052 049
049 051 084
027 040 115 052 049
048 049 084
027 040 115 052 049
052 056 084
Arial
027 040 115 049 054
054 048 050 084
1B 28 73 31 36 36 30 32
54
Times New Roman
027 040 115 049 054
057 048 049 084
1B 28 73 31 36 39 30 31
54
Symbol
027 040 115 049 054
054 056 054 084
1B 28 73 31 36 36 38 36
54
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
E
Wingdings
C(s31402T
027 040 115 051 049
052 048 050 084
1B 28 73 33 31 34 30 32
54
Font Default
E
E
Font Default
Underline
Primary Font
C(3@
C)3@
027 040 051 064
027 041 051 064
1B 28 33 40
1B 29 33 40
Secondary Font
Underline
E
E
E
Enable Fixed
Enable Floating
Disable
C&d0D
C&d3D
C&d@
027 038 100 048 068
027 038 100 051 068
027 038 100 064
1B 26 64 30 44
1B 26 64 33 44
1B 26 64 40
Transparent Print
E
Transparent
Print Data
# of Bytes
C&p#X[Data] 027 038 112 # ... # 088
1B 26 70 # ... # 58
FONT MANAGEMENT
E
E
E
Assign Font ID
Font ID #
C*c#D
C*c0F
C*c1F
027 042 099 # ... # 068
027 042 099 048 070
027 042 099 049 070
1B 2A 63 # ... # 44
1B 2A 63 30 46
1B 2A 63 31 46
Font and
Character
Control
Delete all Fonts
Delete all
temporary fonts
E
E
E
E
E
Delete last font ID
specified
C*c2F
C*c3F
C*c4F
C*c5F
C*c6F
027 042 099 050 070
027 042 099 051 070
027 042 099 052 070
027 042 099 053 070
027 042 099 054 070
1B 2A 63 32 46
1B 2A 63 33 46
1B 2A 63 34 46
1B 2A 63 35 46
1B 2A 63 36 46
Delete last
character specified
Make font
temporary
Make font
permanent
Copy/Assign the
currently invoked
font as temporary
B-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
Soft Symbol Set Management / Creation
E
Set Symbol Set
ID #
C*c#R
027 042 099 # ... # 082
1B 2A 63 # ... # 52
1B 28 66 # ... # 57
E
E
E
Define Symbol
Set
# of Bytes
C(f#W[Data] 027 040 102 # ... # 087
Symbol Set
Control
Delete all symbol
sets
C*c0S
C*c1S
027 042 099 048 083
027 042 099 049 083
1B 2A 63 30 53
1B 2A 63 31 53
Delete all
temporary symbol
sets
E
E
E
Delete current soft
symbol set (last ID
#)
C*c2S
C*c4S
C*c5S
027 042 099 050 083
027 042 099 052 083
027 042 099 053 083
1B 2A 63 32 53
1B 2A 63 34 53
1B 2A 63 35 53
Make current soft
symbol set
temporary
Make current soft
symbol set
permanent
Font Selection by ID Number
E
Select Font
(with ID #)
ID # primary font
C(#X
C)#X
027 040 # ... # 088
027 041 # ... # 088
1B 28 # ... # 58
1B 29 # ... # 58
E
ID # secondary
font
SOFT FONT CREATION
E
E
E
Font Descriptor
(font header)
# of bytes
# of bytes
C)s#W[Data] 027 041 115 # ... # 087
1B 29 73 # ... # 57
1B 28 73 # ... # 57
1B 2A 63 # ... # 45
Download
character
C(s#W[Data] 027 040 115 # ... # 087
Character code
Character code #
(decimal)
C*c#E
027 042 099 # ... # 069
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
GRAPHICS
Raster Graphics
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
Raster
Resolution
75 dots/inch
100 dots/inch
150 dots/inch
200 dots/inch
300 dots/inch
600 dots/inch
C*t75R
027 042 116 055 053
082
1B 2A 74 37 35 52
1B 2A 74 31 30 30 52
1B 2A 74 31 35 30 52
1B 2A 74 32 30 30 52
1B 2A 74 33 30 30 52
1B 2A 74 36 30 30 52
1B 2A 72 30 46
C*t100R
C*t150R
C*t200R
C*t300R
C*t600R
C*r0F
027 042 116 049 048
048 082
027 042 116 049 053
048 082
027 042 116 050 048
048 082
027 042 116 051 048
048 082
027 042 116 054 048
048 082
Raster Graphics Follows
Presentation
027 042 114 048 070
027 042 114 051 070
027 042 114 048 065
orientation
Follows physical
page
C*r3F
1B 2A 72 33 46
Start Raster
Graphics
Left Raster
Graphics Margin
C*r0A
1B 2A 72 30 41
E
E
Current Cursor
C*r1A
C*b#Y
027 042 114 049 065
027 042 098 # ... # 089
1B 2A 72 31 41
Raster Y Offset
# of Raster Lines
of vertical
1B 2A 62 # ... # 59
movement
E
E
Set Raster
Compression
Mode (Method)
Unencoded
C*b0M
C*b1M
027 042 098 048 077
027 042 098 049 077
1B 2A 62 30 4D
1B 2A 62 31 4D
Run-Length
Encoded
E
E
Tagged Image File
Format
C*b2M
C*b3M
027 042 098 050 077
027 042 098 051 077
1B 2A 62 32 4D
1B 2A 62 33 4D
Delta Row
B-14 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
E
Adaptive
C*b5M
027 042 098 053 077
1B 2A 62 35 4D
compression
E
]
Transfer Raster
Data by row
# of Bytes
C*b#W[Data 027 042 098 # ... # 087
1B 2A 62 # ... # 57
E
End Raster
Graphics
Old version
preferred
C*rB
027 042 114 066
1B 2A 72 42
E
E
E
C*rC
C*r#T
C*r#S
027 042 114 067
1B 2A 72 43
Raster Height
Raster Width
# Raster Rows
027 042 114 # ... # 084
027 042 114 # ... # 083
1B 2A 72 # ... # 54
1B 2A 72 # ... # 53
# Pixels of the
Specified
Resolution
THE PRINT MODEL
Imaging
E
Select Current
Pattern
Solid Black
(default)
C*v0T
027 042 118 048 084
1B 2A 76 30 54
E
E
Solid White
C*v1T
C*v2T
027 042 118 049 084
027 042 118 050 084
1B 2A 76 31 54
1B 2A 76 32 54
HP-defined
Shading Pattern
E
E
HP-defined
Cross-Hatched
Pattern
C*v3T
C*v4T
027 042 118 051 084
027 042 118 052 084
1B 2A 76 33 54
1B 2A 76 34 54
User-defined
pattern
E
E
Source
Transparency
Mode
Transparent
Opaque
C*v0N
C*v1N
027 042 118 048 078
027 042 118 049 078
1B 2A 76 30 4E
1B 2A 76 31 4E
E
E
Pattern
Transparency
Mode
Transparent
Opaque
C*v0O
C*v1O
027 042 118 048 079
027 042 118 049 079
1B 2A 76 30 4F
1B 2A 76 31 4F
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
Rectangle Dimensions
E
E
Rectangle
Width
(Horizontal Size)
# of dots
C*c#A
C*c#H
027 042 099 # ... # 065
1B 2A 63 # ... # 41
1B 2A 63 # ... # 48
# of decipoints
027 042 099 # ... # 072
E
E
Rectangle
Height
(Vertical Size)
# of dots
C*c#B
C*c#V
027 042 099 # ... # 066
027 042 099 # ... # 086
1B 2A 63 # ... # 42
1B 2A 63 # ... # 56
# of decipoints
E
E
Fill Rectangular
Area
Solid Black
C*c0P
C*c1P
027 042 099 048 080
027 042 099 049 080
1B 2A 63 30 50
1B 2A 63 31 50
Erase (solid white
fill)
E
E
E
E
E
Shaded Fill
C*c2P
C*c3P
C*c4P
C*c5P
C*c#G
027 042 099 050 080
027 042 099 051 080
027 042 099 052 080
027 042 099 053 080
027 042 099 # ... # 071
1B 2A 63 32 50
1B 2A 63 33 50
1B 2A 63 34 50
1B 2A 63 35 50
1B 2A 63 # ... # 47
Cross-hatched Fill
User-Defined
Current Pattern
Pattern ID
Shading
% of Shading or
Type of Pattern or
User Pattern ID
E
E
2% Gray
C*c2G
027 042 099 050 071
1B 2A 63 32 47
10% Gray
C*c10G
027 042 099 049 048
071
1B 2A 63 31 30 47
E
E
E
E
E
15% Gray
30% Gray
45% Gray
70% Gray
90% Gray
C*c15G
C*c30G
C*c45G
C*c70G
C*c90G
027 042 099 049 053
071
1B 2A 63 31 35 47
1B 2A 63 33 30 47
1B 2A 63 34 35 47
1B 2A 63 37 30 47
1B 2A 63 39 30 47
027 042 099 051 048
071
027 042 099 052 053
071
027 042 099 055 048
071
027 042 099 057 048
071
B-16 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
E
100% Gray
C*c100G
027 042 099 049 048
048 071
1B 2A 63 31 30 30 47
E
E
E
E
E
E
Pattern
1 Horiz. Line
C*c1G
C*c2G
C*c3G
C*c4G
C*c5G
C*c6G
027 042 099 049 071
027 042 099 050 071
027 042 099 051 071
027 042 099 052 071
027 042 099 053 071
027 042 099 054 071
1B 2A 63 31 47
1B 2A 63 32 47
1B 2A 63 33 47
1B 2A 63 34 47
1B 2A 63 35 47
1B 2A 63 36 47
2 Vert. Lines
3 Diagonal Lines
4 Diagonal Lines
5 Square Grid
6 Diagonal Grid
USER-DEFINED PATTERN / MANAGEMENT CREATION
E
Define Pattern
# of bytes
C*c#W[Data 027 042 099 # ... # 087
1B 2A 63 # ... # 57
]
E
User-Defined
Pattern Control
Delete all patterns
C*c0Q
C*c1Q
027 042 099 048 081
027 042 099 049 081
1B 2A 63 30 51
1B 2A 63 31 51
E
Delete all
temporary
patterns
E
E
E
E
E
Delete current
pattern
C*c2Q
C*c4Q
C*c5Q
C*p0R
C*p1R
027 042 099 050 081
027 042 099 052 081
027 042 099 053 081
027 042 112 048 082
027 042 112 049 082
1B 2A 63 32 51
1B 2A 63 34 51
1B 2A 63 35 51
1B 2A 70 30 52
1B 2A 70 31 52
Make pattern
temporary
Make pattern
permanent
Set Pattern
Reference
Rotate with
orientation
Point
Follow physical
page
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
MACROS
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
E
Macro ID
Macro ID #
C&f#Y
C&f0X
C&f1X
C&f2X
C&f3X
C&f4X
C&f5X
C&f6X
C&f7X
027 038 102 # ... # 089
027 038 102 048 088
027 038 102 049 088
027 038 102 050 088
027 038 102 051 088
027 038 102 052 088
027 038 102 053 088
027 038 102 054 088
027 038 102 055 088
1B 26 66 # ... # 59
1B 26 66 30 58
1B 26 66 31 58
1B 26 66 32 58
1B 26 66 33 58
1B 26 66 34 58
1B 26 66 35 58
1B 26 66 36 58
1B 26 66 37 58
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
Macro Control
Start Macro Def.
Stop Macro Def.
Execute Macro
Call Macro
Enable Overlay
Disable Overlay
Delete Macros
Delete All Temp.
Macros
E
E
E
Delete Macro ID
Make Temporary
Make Permanent
C&f8X
C&f9X
C&f10X
027 038 102 056 088
027 038 102 057 088
1B 26 66 38 58
1B 26 66 39 58
1B 26 66 31 30 58
027 038 102 049 048
088
STATUS READBACK
E
Set Status
Invalid Location
C*s0T
027 042 115 048 084
1B 2A 73 30 54
Readback
Location Type
E
E
E
E
E
E
Currently Selected
All Locations
Internal
C*s1T
C*s2T
C*s3T
C*s4T
C*s5T
C*s7T
027 042 115 049 084
027 042 115 050 084
027 042 115 051 084
027 042 115 052 084
027 042 115 053 084
027 042 115 055 084
1B 2A 73 31 54
1B 2A 73 32 54
1B 2A 73 33 54
1B 2A 73 34 54
1B 2A 73 35 54
1B 2A 73 37 54
Downloaded
Cartridge
User-Installed
ROM (SIMMs)
B-18 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
E
Set Status
Readback
Location Unit
All entities of the
Location Type
C*s0U
C*s1U
C*s2U
027 042 115 048 085
027 042 115 049 085
027 042 115 050 085
1B 2A 73 30 55
E
E
Entity 1 or
Temporary
1B 2A 73 31 55
1B 2A 73 32 55
Entity 2 or
Permanent
E
E
E
E
E
Entity 3
Entity 4
Font
C*s3U
C*s4U
C*s0I
C*s1I
C*s2I
027 042 115 051 085
027 042 115 052 085
027 042 115 048 073
027 042 115 049 073
027 042 115 050 073
1B 2A 73 33 55
1B 2A 73 34 55
1B 2A 73 30 49
1B 2A 73 31 49
1B 2A 73 32 49
Inquire Status
Readback Entity
Macro
User-defined
Pattern
E
E
E
Symbol Set
C*s3I
C*s4I
C&r0F
027 042 115 051 073
027 042 115 052 073
027 038 114 048 070
1B 2A 73 33 49
1B 2A 73 34 49
1B 26 72 30 46
Font Extended
Flush All Pages
Flush All
complete pages
E
E
E
Flush All Page
Data
C&r1F
C*s1M
C*s#X
027 038 114 049 070
027 042 115 049 077
027 042 115 # ... # 088
1B 26 72 31 46
1B 2A 73 31 4D
1B 2A 73 # ... # 58
Free Memory
Space
—
Echo
# = Echo value
(-32767 to 32767)
PROGRAMMING HINTS
E
E
E
E
End-Of-Line
Wrap
Enabled
Disabled
ON
C&s0C
C&s1C
CY
027 038 115 048 067
1B 26 73 30 43
1B 26 73 31 43
1B 59
027 038 115 049 067
027 089
Display
Functions
OFF
CZ
027 090
1B 5A
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.1 PCL printer commands (continued)
Function
Parameter
Command
Decimal Value
Hexadecimal Value
PCL VECTOR GRAPHICS SWITCHING/SET-UP PICTURE FRAME
E
Enter PCL Mode Use previous PCL
cursor position
C%0A
027 037 048 065
1B 25 30 41
E
E
Use current
HP-GL/2 pen
position for
cursor position
C%1A
027 037 049 065
1B 25 31 41
Enter HP-GL/2
Mode
Use Previous
HP-GL/2 pen
position
C%0B
027 037 048 066
1B 25 30 42
E
E
E
E
Use current PCL
cursor position
C%1B
C*c#K
C*c#L
C*c0T
027 037 049 066
1B 25 31 42
HP-GL/2 Plot
Horizontal Size
Horizontal size in
inches
027 042 099 # ... # 075
027 042 099 # ... # 076
027 042 099 048 084
1B 2A 63 # ... # 4B
1B 2A 63 # ... # 4C
1B 2A 63 30 54
HP-GL/2 Plot
Vertical Size
Vertical size in
inches
Set Picture
Frame Anchor
Point
Set anchor point
to cursor position
E
E
Picture Frame
Horizontal Size
Decipoints
Decipoints
C*c#X
C*c#Y
027 042 099 # ... # 088
027 042 099 # ... # 089
1B 2A 63 # ... # 58
1B 2A 63 # ... # 59
Picture Frame
Vertical Size
B-20 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
In Figure B.2, parameters in brackets [] are optional.
HP-GL/2
Context
Printer
Commands
Figure B.2 HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands
Command
Mnemonic
Parameters
DUAL CONTEXT EXTENSIONS
Enter PCL Mode
Esc%#A
0 - Retain previous PCL cursor position
1 - Use current HP-GL/2 pen position
Reset
EscE
F1
None
Primary Font
Font_ID
Font_ID
Secondary Font
Scalable Or Bitmapped Fonts
FN
SB
0 - Scalable fonts only
1 - Bitmapped fonts allowed
PALETTE EXTENSIONS
Transparency Mode
Screened Vectors
TR
0 - Off (opaque)
1 - On (transparent)
SV
[screen_type[,shading[,index]]]
VECTOR GROUP
Arc Absolute
Arc Relative
AA
AR
x_center, y_center, sweep_angle [,chord_angle];
x_increment, y_increment, sweep-angle
[,chord_angle];
Absolute Arc Three Point
Bezier Absolute
AT
BZ
x_inter, y_inter, x_end, y_end [,chord_angle];
x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt
x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt
x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt . . .
[x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt
x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt
x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt];
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.2 HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands (continued)
Command
Mnemonic
Parameters
Bezier Relative
BR
x1_control_pt_increments,
y1_control_pt_increments,
x2_control_pt_increments,
y2_control_pt_increments
x3_control_pt_increments,
y3_control_pt_increments . . .
[x1_control_pt_increments,
y1_control_pt_increments,
x2_control_pt_increments,
y2_control_pt_increments,
x3_control_pt_increments,
y3_control_pt_increments];
Plot Absolute
Plot Relative
Pen Down
PA
PR
PD
PU
RT
[x,y . . . [,x,y]];
[x,y . . . [,x,y]];
[x,y . . . [,x,y]];
[x,y . . . [,x,y]];
Pen Up
Relative Arc Three Point
x_incr_inter, y_incr_inter, x_incr_end, y_incr_end
[,chord_angle];
Polyline Encoded
PE
[flag[val]|coord_pair . . . [flag[val]|coord_pair]];
POLYGON GROUP
Circle
CI
RA
RR
radius [,chord_angle];
Fill Rectangle Absolute
Fill Rectangle Relative
Edge Rectangle Absolute
Edge Rectangle Relative
Fill Wedge
x_coordinate, y_coordinate;
x_increment, y_increment;
EA
ER
x_coordinate, y_coordinate;
x_increment, y_increment;
WG
EW
PM
FP
radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [,chord_angle];
radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [,chord_angle];
polygon_definition;
Edge Wedge
Polygon Mode
Fill Polygon
0 - Odd/Even
1 - non-zero winding
Edge Polygon
EP
None
B-22 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.2 HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands (continued)
Command Mnemonic
CHARACTER GROUP
Parameters
Select Standard Font
SS
SA
DI
None
Select Alternate Font
Absolute Direction
Relative Direction
Absolute Character Size
Relative Character Size
Character Slant
None
[run, rise];
DR
SI
[run, rise];
[width, height];
[width, height];
[tangent_of_angle];
[width [,height]]
SR
SL
Extra Space
ES
Standard Font Definition
Alternate Font Definition
Character Fill Mode
Label Origin
SD
AD
CF
LO
LB
[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];
[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];
[fill_mode [,edge_pen]];
[position];
Label
[char . . . [char]]1bterm
[1bterm [,mode]];
[spaces, lines];
Define Label Terminator
Character Plot
DT
CP
TD
DV
Transparent Data
Define Variable Text Path
[mode];
[path [,line]];
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s
Figure B.2 HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands (continued)
Command
Mnemonic
Parameters
LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP
Line Type
LT
LA
[line_type [,pattern_length [,mode]]];
[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];
[width [,pen]];
Line Attributes
Pen Width
PW
WU
SP
Pen Width Unit Selection
Select Pen
[type];
[pen]; (required, 1 for black (recommended) or 0 for
white)
Symbol Mode
Fill Type
SM
FT
[char];
[fill_type [,option1 [,option2]]];
[x_coordinate, y_coordinate];
Anchor Corner
Raster Fill Definition
AC
RF
[index [,width, height, pen_nbr . . . pen_nbr]]; (width
and height must be less than 255)
User Defined Line Type
Scale
UL
[index [,gap1 . . . gapn]];
CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP
SC
[x1, x2, y1, y2 [,type [,left, bottom]]];
or
[x1,xfactor,y1,yfactor,2];
Input Window
IW
IP
[xLL,yLL,xUR,yUR];
[p1x, p1y [,p2x, p2y]];
[p1x, p1y [,p2x, p2y]];
None
Input P1 and P2
Input Relative P1 and P2
Default Values
IR
DF
IN
Initialize
[n];
Rotate Coordinate System
RO
[angle];
B-24 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C o n t r o l C o d e s
Control Codes
Figure B.3 Control Codes
Decimal
Value
Function
Symbol
Description
Backspace
BS
8
Move one column left unless at left margin, in
which case no action is taken.
Horizontal Tab
HT
9
Move to next horizontal tab stop. The tab stops
are at the left margin, and every eight columns
to the right of the left margin.
Line Feed
LF
FF
10
12
Move to next print line while maintaining
current column position.
Form Feed
Move to the first line at top of the next page
while maintaining current column position.
Carriage Return
Shift Out
CR
SO
13
14
Move to left margin on the current print line.
Select characters that follow from the current
secondary font until receipt of a Shift In.
Shift In
Escape
Space
SI
EC
SP
15
27
32
Select characters that follow from the current
primary font until receipt of a Shift Out.
Indicates the beginning of a special control
sequence (escape sequence).
Move one column to the right unless already at
the right margin, in which case no action is
taken.
A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )
❖
B-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-26 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
I/O Port Polling
C x idneppA
A p p e n d i x C : I / O P o r t P o l l i n g
❖
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The 4505/4505ps printers provide a parallel port, serial port,
and one additional network interface port option, all of which
may be active at the same time.
The 4510/4510ps printers provide a parallel port, serial port,
and three additional network interface port options, all of
which may be active at the same time.
To coordinate automatic switching among the ports, the
printer monitors the parallel, serial, and network interface
ports for incoming data. When a print job is detected on one
port, the printer sends a busy signal to the other ports and
queues the print job into memory for processing. This is
called port polling. Note that while all ports may be
simultaneously active, only one port at a time is able to
receive a print job.
For the 4505/4505ps printers:
When print jobs are pending on all three ports (parallel,
serial, and the network interface port), the port polling
sequence is:
1 Parallel
2 Serial
3 Network
4 Back to Parallel
C-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the 4510/4510ps printers:
When print jobs are pending on all five ports (parallel, serial,
and the network interface ports), the port polling sequence is:
1 Parallel
2 Serial
3 Ethernet
4 Token Ring
5 Back to Parallel
LocalTalk is not a part of this sequence. When a print job is
detected on the LocalTalk port, the print job is put in the
queue immediately after any current job finishes.
Note
Except for those on the LocalTalk interface, print jobs are
processed in the sequence in which they are received by the
printer. As soon as one print job has finished, the printer
continues polling until it finds another port that has received
data.
If a print job is incomplete, the printer waits until the port is
inactive for the Port Timeout period. After that, the printer
ends the incomplete job and continues polling the ports when
either:
•
Auto Job End is On
or
•
Another print job is received on a port
Therefore, the printer does not excessively service one
particular port.
A p p e n d i x C : I / O P o r t P o l l i n g
❖
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may set the Port Timeout period and Auto Job End on
the Control Panel or with the RUI. For additional information
on Port Timeout or Auto Job End, either see Chapter 3: Using
the Control Panel, or refer to the Document Services for
Printing Guide.
C-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Ordering Information
D x idneppA
Printer Options .................................................................... D-2
Additional Order Items ....................................................... D-7
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox to order any of the
printer options listed in Figure D.1.
Printer
Options
4505ps and 4510ps Users:
The 4505ps and 4510ps come with these options
pre-installed:
•
•
4 MB SIMM (for a total of 6 MB memory)
PostScript card
Note
Figure D.1 Printer options
Option/Part No.
Description
Comments
Printer Memory (SIMM)
TO INSTALL, go to: Chapter 5.
97K15280 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
4 MB SIMM
SIMM requirements:
• No parity
• 70 nanosecond access time
• 8 bits
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
• One-sided
It is recommended that you use a SIMM
manufactured by Xerox / Rank Xerox. However,
other SIMMs are widely available. Be sure you
purchase the correct SIMM configuration.
97K15300 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
16 MB SIMM
German
Italian
Even though up to two 16 MB
SIMMs can be installed, the printer
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
recognizes a maximum of 16 MB.
Note
D-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Figure D.1 Printer options (continued)
Option/Part No.
Description
Comments
PostScript
TO INSTALL, go to: Installation instructions
packaged with the option.
97K15510 English (Xerox)
4505 Adobe PostScript
97K19490 English (Rank Xerox) Level 2 language interpreter
97K19500 French
97K19510 German
A minimum of 6 MB of memory is required,
comprised of 2 MB resident base memory plus
one 4 MB SIMM purchased separately. (See
Printer Memory option, above.)
97K19520 Italian
97K19290 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19530 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
97K17430 English (Xerox)
4510 Adobe PostScript
97K19790 English (Rank Xerox) Level 2 language interpreter
97K19800 French
97K19810 German
97K19820 Italian
97K19300 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19830 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Font Cards
TO INSTALL, go to: Chapter 5.
Contact Xerox / Rank Xerox
For PCL5e only.
English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Figure D.1 Printer options (continued)
Option/Part No.
Description
Comments
Network Interfaces
TO INSTALL, go to: Installation instructions
packaged with the option.
97K15330 English (Xerox)
Ethernet card
97K19610 English (Rank Xerox) (with BNC and RJ-45
Ethernet card includes protocols: Novell
NetWare, TCP/IP, EtherTalk, DEC LAT, and LAN
Manager.
97K19620 French
connectors)
97K19630 German
97K19640 Italian
97K19270 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19650 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Token Ring card includes protocols: Novell
NetWare and LAN Manager.
Novell systems require Print Server v1.2 and
above, in the form of:
97K15320 English (Xerox)
LocalTalk card
•
•
•
PSERVER.VAP for v2.x NetWare file
servers
PSERVER.NLM for v3.x NetWare
file servers
PSERVER.EXE for a stand-alone
PC-based print server
97K19550 English (Rank Xerox) (with a DIN-8 connector)
97K19560 French
97K19570 German
97K19580 Italian
97K19260 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19590 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
UNIX TCP/IP systems require:
97K15340 English (Xerox)
97K19670 English (Rank Xerox) (with RJ-45 and female DE-9
97K19680 French
97K19690 German
97K19700 Italian
97K19280 Spanish (Xerox)
97K19710 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Token Ring card
•
•
•
Support for lpd or rprint
(Xerox-supplied)
Clients must support TCP/IP,
TELNET, and UDP
Optional load hosts require TFTP or
RARP protocols
connectors)
EtherTalk systems require AppleTalk Phase 2.
DEC LAT systems require that clients support
the LAT protocol under the VAX/VMS or
ULTRIX-32 operating systems.
LAN Manager systems require:
•
•
OS/2 version 1.30 or above
Microsoft’s LAN Manager version
2.1 and above
•
TCP/IP on the LAN Manager server
D-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Figure D.1 Printer options (continued)
Option/Part No. Description
Comments
PAPER HANDLING OPTIONS (For paper sizes, refer to the Chapter 2: Handling Paper.)
Paper Trays
TO INSTALL, go to: Chapter 2.
109R00029 English (Xerox)
250-sheet Universal Tray†
Adjustable to:
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
•
•
•
•
•
•
A4
8.5 x 11 (Letter)
A5
Executive
A4 Transparency or Label
8.5 x 11 (Letter) Transparency or Label
109R00031 English (Xerox)
250-sheet 8.5 x 14
(Legal) Tray†
Adjustable to:
Spanish (Xerox)
•
•
•
8.5 x 11 (Letter)
8.5 x 13 (Folio)
8.5 x 14 (Legal)
30-Envelope Tray†
Adjustable to:
109R00026 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
•
•
•
•
COM-10
Monarch
DL
German
Italian
C5
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
109R00024 English (Xerox)
Spanish (Xerox)
500-sheet 8.5 x 11
(Letter) Tray‡
8.5 x 11 (Letter)
A4
500-sheet A4 Tray‡
109R00030 English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Figure D.1 Printer options (continued)
Option/Part No.
Lower Base
Description
Comments
TO INSTALL, go to: Installation instructions
packaged with the option.
97K19160 English (Xerox)
109R00105 English (Rank Xerox) Universal Tray
109R00106 French
250-sheet Base with
The base attaches to the bottom of the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps.
109R00107 German
109R00108 Italian
97K19330 Spanish (Xerox)
109R00109 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
109R00111 English (Rank Xerox) 500-sheet Base with A4 Tray
109R00112 French
The base attaches to the bottom of the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps.
109R00113 German
109R00114 Italian
109R00115 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
97K19170 English (Xerox)
97K19340 Spanish (Xerox)
500-sheet Base with
8.5 x 11 (Letter) Tray
The base attaches to the bottom of the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps.
†Trays fit in either the 250-sheet Base or the Standard paper source.
‡Trays fit in only the 500-sheet Base.
D-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Figure D.2 shows additional items for the 4505/4505ps or
4510/4510ps you may order from your dealer or Xerox / Rank
Xerox.
Additional
Order Items
Figure D.2 Additional order items
Type/Part No.
Description
Comments
EP Cartridge
See Chapter 6: Maintaining the
Printer for installation instructions.
113R5
English (Xerox)
English (Rank Xerox)
French
German
Italian
Spanish (Xerox)
Spanish (Rank Xerox)
Cables
See Appendix A: Printer and Cable
Specifications for cable
information.
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Figure D.2 Additional order items (continued)
Type/Part No.
Description
Comments
Software Diskettes
For more information on Xerox
software drivers and utilities for
the printer, refer to the Document
Services for Printing Guide.
300E62150 English (Xerox)
300E62150 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62360 French
DS/P Windows 3.1 PCL5e printer
drivers diskette
300E62210 German
300E62460 Italian
300E62410 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62410 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62140 English (Xerox)
300E62140 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62350 French
DOS printer drivers diskette
300E62200 German
300E62450 Italian
300E62400 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62400 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62160 English (Xerox)
300E62160 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62370 French
DS/P SETUP and RUI diskette
300E62220 German
300E62470 Italian
300E62420 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62420 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62180 English (Xerox)
300E62180 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62390 French
Xerox TrueType Screen Font Pack
diskette
300E62340 German
300E62490 Italian
300E62440 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62440 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62250 English (Xerox)
300E62250 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62580 French
DS/P Service Coordinator (NLM)
diskette, and DS/P SMS diskette
300E62550 German
300E62640 Italian
300E62610 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62610 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
D-8
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Figure D.2 Additional order items (continued)
Type/Part No.
Description
Comments
Software Diskettes (continued)
For more information on Xerox
software drivers and utilities for
the printer, refer to the Document
Services for Printing Guide.
300K39990 English (Xerox)
300K39990 English (Rank Xerox)
300K40110 French
Disk Kit, containing all of the above
300K40000 German
300K40070 Italian
300K40060 Spanish (Xerox)
300K40060 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300K30151 English (Xerox)
300K30151 English (Rank Xerox)
300K40100 French
Macintosh PostScript printer driver
diskette
300K40090 German
300K40120 Italian
300K40110 Spanish (Xerox)
300K40110 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62240 English (Xerox)
300E62240 English (Rank Xerox)
300E62710 French
Windows PostScript printer drivers
diskette
300E62700 German
300E62730 Italian
300E62720 Spanish (Xerox)
300E62720 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
300E62260 English (Xerox)
300E62260 English (Rank Xerox)
XNIC software DOS distribution
diskette
300E62270 English (Xerox)
300E62270 English (Rank Xerox)
XNIC software UNIX distribution
diskette
300E64510 English (Xerox)
300E64510 English (Rank Xerox)
XNIC software Lan Manager
distribution diskette
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Figure D.2 Additional order items (continued)
Type/Part No.
Description
Comments
User Documentation
720P53350 English (Xerox)
720P53350 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55350 French
Quick Reference
720P54350 German
720P57350 Italian
720P56350 Spanish (Xerox)
720P56350 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53020 English (Xerox)
721P53020 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55020 French
Setting Up Guide
720P54020 German
720P57020 Italian
720P56020 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56020 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53030 English (Xerox)
721P53030 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55030 French
User’s Guide
720P54030 German
720P57030 Italian
720P56030 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56030 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53040 English (Xerox)
721P53040 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55040 French
Document Services for Printing Guide
720P54040 German
720P57040 Italian
720P56040 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56040 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720S53130 English (Xerox)
721S53130 English (Rank Xerox)
720S55130 French
Document kit, containing the four
preceding documents
720S54130 German
720S57130 Italian
720S56130 Spanish (Xerox)
721S56130 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
D-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s
Figure D.2 Additional order items (continued)
Type/Part No.
Description
Comments
User Documentation (continued)
720P53070 English (Xerox)
721P53070 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55070 French
Lower Base Installation Instructions
720P54070 German
720P57070 Italian
720P56070 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56070 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53180 English (Xerox)
721P53180 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55180 French
Networking: Ethernet (XNIC-E’NET)
Installation and Configuration Guide
720P54180 German
720P57180 Italian
720P56180 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56180 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53200 English (Xerox)
721P53200 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55200 French
Networking: LocalTalk (XNIC-L’TALK)
Installation and Configuration Guide
720P54200 German
720P57200 Italian
720P56200 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56200 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53190 English (Xerox)
721P53190 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55190 French
Networking: Token Ring (XNIC-T’RING)
Installation and Configuration Guide
720P54190 German
720P57190 Italian
720P56190 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56190 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
720P53210 English (Xerox)
721P53210 English (Rank Xerox)
720P55210 French
PostScript Installation Instructions
720P54210 German
720P57210 Italian
720P56210 Spanish (Xerox)
721P56210 Spanish (Rank Xerox)
A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n
❖
D-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
Environmental
Specifications
E
x idneppA
A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Xerox Corporation is committed to an international program to
safeguard our environment by diverting certain products and
materials from the solid waste stream. We do this by reusing
serviceable components and remanufacturing selected products.
The Xerox
Commitment to
Environmental
Quality
To support this effort we have made it easy for you to return selected
printer equipment and empty print cartridges to Xerox. We
recondition the print cartridges and refill them with Xerox toner and
developer. All products we manufacture meet our stringent
performance standards and are backed by the same Total
Satisfaction Guarantee we offer with our newly manufactured
products.
The world-wide effort to remanufacture printer equipment and
recondition and reuse print cartridges benefits the environment and
conserves our natural resources by reducing waste going into our
landfills. Besides, it makes good business sense for Xerox and Xerox
customers. Please join us in this effort.
4505/4505ps
45.0 dB
4510/4510ps
50.0 dB
Acoustic
Noise
Figures
Printing:
Warm-up:
Standby:
45.0 dB
40.0 dB
50.0 dB
40.0 dB
(maximums)
E-2
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Class B:
FCC Compliance
Statement for
United States
Users
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician
for help.
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain
compliance with FCC regulations.
Caution: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Xerox
Corporation could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Canadian EME Regulations:
VDE Compliance
Statement for
International Users
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio
noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio
interference regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications.
Cet appareil numérique est conforme aux limites d’émission de
bruits radioélectriques pour les appareils de Classe B stipulées dans
le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique du Ministere des
Communications du Canada.
For Rank Xerox: This laser printer meets the requirements of
EN5022 Class B.
European EME Regulations:
This equipment has been tested and determined to be compliant
with VDE requirements for a Class B device.
A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
E-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Xerox equipment and supplies were designed and tested to
meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency
examination, approval, and compliance with established
environmental standards.
Operational
Safety
Attention to the following notes ensures the continued safe operation
of your equipment.
Always connect the equipment to a properly grounded power source
receptacle. If in doubt, have the receptacle checked by a qualified
electrician.
WARNING: Improper connection of the equipment grounding
conductor can result in electrical shock.
Always follow all warnings and instructions marked on, or supplied
with, the equipment.
Always locate the equipment on a solid support surface with
adequate strength for the weight of the machine.
Always exercise care in moving or relocating the equipment.
Always place the equipment in an area which provides adequate
room area for ventilation and servicing.
Always use the materials and supplies specifically designed for your
Xerox equipment. Use of unsuitable materials may result in poor
performance and, possibly, a hazardous situation.
Never use a ground adaptor plug to connect the equipment to a
power source receptacle that lacks a ground connection terminal.
Never attempt any maintenance function that is not specifically
described in this documentation.
Never obstruct ventilation openings. These are provided to prevent
overheating.
Never install the equipment near a radiator or any other heat source.
Never override or “cheat” electrical or mechanical interlock devices.
Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings.
Never operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or odors.
Disconnect the power cord from the power source receptacle and
contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox to correct the problem.
If you need any additional safety information concerning the
equipment or materials, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.
E-4
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in a
hazardous radiation exposure.
This product will produce ozone during normal operation. The ozone
produced is dependent on copy volume and is heavier than air.
Providing the proper environmental parameters as specified by
Xerox will ensure that concentration levels meet safe limits.
If additional information concerning ozone is needed, request the
Xerox publication (600P83222), “Ozone,” by calling in the USA
1-800-828-6571.
A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
❖
E-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
light exposure.
Laser Safety
This equipment complies with appropriate safety standards.
With specific regard to lasers, the equipment complies with laser
product performance standards set by governmental, national, and
international agencies as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit
hazardous light as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of
customer operation and maintenance.
When you perform various operator functions, laser danger labels
may be visible. These labels are for your dealer or service technician
and are placed on or near panels, or shields, which require a tool for
removal. THESE PANELS ARE NOT TO BE REMOVED BY USERS
OF THE PRINTER. THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE AREAS
INSIDE THESE COVERS.
Luokitus on tehty standardin EN 60825 mukaisesti
Klassningen är gjord i enlighet met standarden EN 60 825
Laser Safety
Warning for
Finland and
Sweden
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla
tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle
näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksansvisning
specficerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
E-6
❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Accounting File The file SMS generates for storing printer
and job statistics. An accounting file is created for each
Service Coordinator when DS/P Authorization is set ON in
SETUP. “PRINTER.LOG” is the name of the SMS accounting
file.
Alert Message A message SMS sends to the client that
notifies user of an event at the printer.
Attach The term used in SMS for logging into a file server.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
A digital coding system used to represent characters or
control functions electronically, each character being
represented by either 7 or 8 bits.
Auto emulation See Language Sensing.
Baud rate The data transfer rate between the computer and
the printer; set only if the serial port is used. The computer
and the printer must be configured at the same baud rate
(between 300 and 57.6 KB depending on the type of
computer used).
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bindery A data structure on each file server that shows the
existence and status of printers on a Novell network.
Bit Binary digit. The smallest unit of information in a digital
computer. A bit can take on the value of either 1 or 0.
Bitmap A pattern of bits representing the dots in a printed
image.
Bitmapped fonts Digitized images of each character in a font.
Bitmapped fonts generally require more memory than
scalable fonts. If you want to change to a different size or
style (like italics), you have to download a separate
bitmapped font.
Boot To restart a computer without turning off the power.
Also referred to as a soft start.
Byte A unit of 8 consecutive bits. A byte is used to represent a
character or control function.
CAPTURE A Novell command used to redirect output from a
client to a print queue.
Character set The collection of characters contained in a font.
Each character set has been designed for a special purpose.
Some sets include all printable characters found on most
standard computer keyboards, while others are intended for
such applications as math, foreign language, typesetting, or
law.
Chargeback See User Chargeback.
Client A PC attached to a Novell network.
Client Software See SMS Client Software.
Configuration File The file that stores the relationship
between the SMS Service Coordinator and the printer.
“XDSP.NLM” is the name of the SMS configuration file.
GL-2 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Context saving See State Saving.
Controller board The printer’s system controller, with
firmware to direct all printer operations and slots for adding
optional cards. The controller board is accessed through the
back panel of the printer.
Control Panel An LCD display to show status messages,
prompts, and menu items; indicator lights to show the
condition and status of the printer; and keys for accessing the
printer settings. The Control Panel is on the face of the
printer.
Data string The term used to identify textual data—data that
reads as text. SMS accounting export data files present data
strings enclosed within quotation marks.
Default A printer setting that is used in the absence of any
other setting or command from the user. (See also Factory-set
Default.)
Default font The font that the printer will use if the user or the
software application does not specify otherwise.
Description A setting the supervisor defines in the DS/P
UTILITY to specify a printer’s uniqueness. SMS users can
locate a printer by its description using the Best Fit feature.
Detach The term used in SMS for logging off a file server.
Direct-connect printer A printer tied to a Novell network via
its internal network interface card.
Document One or more pages forming a logical whole.
DOS (Disk Operating System) The operating system software
that controls PC systems. Refer to the DOS manual packaged
with your PC system.
Downloaded fonts See Downloading.
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downloading The process of transferring fonts or other data
from computer to the printer memory. Permanently
downloaded data will be stored in the printer until it is turned
off.
Dpi Dots per inch. A measure of the resolution of a printed
image. Laser printers use dots to form images. The greater
the dpi, the finer the resolution.
DS/P Document Services for Printing. The name of Xerox
printer utility package comprised of SETUP, DS/P UTILITY,
RUI (Remote User Interface), SMS (Service & Management
Services), and printer drivers.
DS/P UTILITY The software that allows NetWare supervisors
to rename direct-connect printers, to assign them to SMS
Service Coordinators, and to set SMS usage parameters.
Emulation Imitating the operational functionality of a
program or language with equaling or surpassing
functionality.
EP cartridge The Xerox electronic printing cartridge that
contains microfine toner and the imaging roller drum.
EPROM/ROM Acronyms for Erasable Programmable Read
Only Memory and Read Only Memory, which describe a type
of computer chip used in the printer. EPROM/ROM is where
the firmware and internal fonts reside.
Error messages 1) Messages that appear on the Control Panel
display when the printer has encountered some difficulty.
2) Messages sent to the SMS client when either the printer,
the SMS Service Coordinator, or Novell has encountered
some difficulty.
Escape character A control code or control character
represented by ASCII 27 (1B in Hexadecimal) which must be
placed in front of a printer command. The Escape character
GL-4 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tells the printer to execute, rather than print, the character
sequence following it.
Escape sequence A sequence of characters beginning with an
escape code and comprising a printer command.
Factory-set default The settings that are programmed into
the Xerox printer before it is shipped from the manufacturer.
These settings are in use unless you permanently override
them using either the printer Control Panel or the Remote
User Interface. Commands from a software application
temporarily override factory defaults.
File Server A network storage device often used to store
master copies of applications software. It is also used for
exchanging and accessing files without having to copy them
to a floppy diskette.
Firmware The programs stored in EPROM/ROM chips on the
printer’s controller board.
Font A collection of characters with a consistent style.
Different fonts can be selected for printing. Fonts can refer to
the printer’s internal fonts, or fonts stored in optional font
cards or on your computer.
Font card Small, thin credit card size electronic devices that
contain fonts.
Font characteristics Font orientation, character height, stroke
weight, and typeface. What a printed font looks like.
Fuser roller Used to bond dry ink to the page.
Handshaking An exchange of signals between two devices in
a computer network, prior to the transfer of data. The purpose
of handshaking is to determine the readiness of each device
to exchange data.
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host The source of data or the input device for the printer. It
may be a personal computer or network device.
Hot Key Keystroke combinations used to activate and exit the
DOS version of SMS.
I/O (Input/Output) The communication between the printer
and the host computer.
I/O port Input/Output port, where data is received and
transmitted.
IVD See Integrated Visual Display
Integrated Visual Display Also referred to as IVD, this is the
user-interface portion of SMS which displays printer and job
status information. It is from the IVD that the user initiates
SMS functions.
Intellifonts Scalable fonts developed by Agfa Compugraphics
and licensed to Hewlett Packard.
Internal fonts The fonts that come with the printer, residing
in permanent memory: EPROM/ROM.
Language Sensing The ability of a port to sense the PDL
(Page Description Language) of the incoming job and then
switch to that PDL if necessary.
Load balancing An SMS accounting term used for describing
the ability to generate printer usage statistics for each
selected user.
Local printer A printer that is connected to a network client
through a serial or parallel cable. Only the client user has
access to a local printer.
Lower base The optional base for the 4505/4505ps and
4510/4510ps printers that comes in two sizes: 250-sheet and
500-sheet.
GL-6 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual tray See MP tray.
Menu Choices of settings and controls. There are menus for
the printer’s Control Panel, RUI (Remote User Interface), SMS
(Status & Management Services), and for many software
applications.
Memory The space in a device where information is stored,
or the ability of a device to keep information until needed.
(See also RAM, ROM.)
MP tray Multipurpose tray. The MP tray comes with the
4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers and fits into the
multipurpose paper source on the front of the printer. Also
referred to as the “manual tray.”
NetWare This is the network operating system (NOS)
developed by Novell for use with its networks.
NetWare Loadable Module Also referred to as NLM, this is a
NetWare program which runs on the network operating
system.
NetWare Supervisor A user with access to NetWare
functionality and control over and above that of normal users.
For example, only users with supervisor privileges can create
and delete print queues.
Network Operating System Also referred to as NOS. The
NOS runs on the file server and serves to control the network.
Network-indirect printer A printer connected to either: 1) a
server running PSERVER.NLM or PSERVER.EXE; or 2) a
network client running RPRINTER. EXE.
NIC An abbreviation for Network Interface Card. The
optional card that attaches to the controller board for
interfacing with a network. (See also XNIC-E’NET,
XNIC-L’TALK, XNIC-T’RING.)
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NLM See NetWare Loadable Module.
NOS See Network Operating System.
NVM Nonvolatile Memory. Memory that is not corrupted
when power is removed, usually due to battery backup; used
to store printer settings while the printer is powered off.
NVRAM Nonvolatile Random Access Memory.
Offline When the printer is offline, it does not accept data
from the computer.
Online When the printer is online, it is able to accept data
from the computer.
Orientation Choice of printing portrait (vertically) or
landscape (horizontally) on a page.
Output tray Where printed material is delivered. The output
tray on the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps is located on the
top of the printer.
Paper jam When paper becomes wedged somewhere along
the paper path.
Paper source Paper can feed into the printer, via a paper tray
or other paper feeding device. Also, the setting in a software
application that specifies from where paper will feed for
printing. (The paper source is mapped to a physical tray or a
sequence of trays.)
Parallel port A type of port in which data is transmitted and
received in bytes rather than bits. Typically used for local
printing over short distances.
Parity The addition of one or more redundant bits of
information used to verify its accuracy.
PC Personal Computer; specifically, an IBM PC or compatible.
GL-8 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCL 5e Hewlett Packard Printer Control Language Level 5e.
PCONSOLE A Novell utility that provides, for example, the
user with the ability to create and delete queues, or to display
a list of jobs currently in the print queue.
PDL Page Description Language. The set of rules that
describe a fully formatted page, independent of the device
used for printing. PCL and PostScript are examples of page
description languages.
Permanent fonts Also called permanently downloaded fonts.
These are fonts set up in an application so that when the
application is loaded, the fonts are downloaded to the
printer’s memory. They then do not have to be downloaded
for every print job. Permanent fonts remain downloaded until
the printer is powered OFF.
Pitch The number of characters to the inch (10 pitch is 10
characters per inch). Typically thought of as “horizontal”
measurement.
Point Type height is traditionally measured in points. One
point is approximately 1/72 inch. Typically thought of as
“vertical” measurement.
Polling A method to control the data coming into the printer
through the I/O ports, which can include the parallel, serial,
and optional network ports. The printer looks at each port in
succession for incoming data, then transfers it to the print
buffer where it waits for processing. The print buffer is shared
among the ports, so data can arrive for different jobs
continuously.
PostScript A PDL developed by Adobe Systems in 1987.
Print density The relative darkness of print on the page.
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Print queue A subdirectory on the server to which print jobs
are redirected. Jobs are released from the queue and sent to
the printer when the printer is ready to accept jobs.
Print server A computer system attached to a local area
network that provides shared printing among network
clients. The print server draws files from print queues on the
file server. Typically the print server is dedicated only to that
function—it is not used to run other end-user software.
Printer description See Description.
Printer driver A program that communicates between the
printer and the software application. The printer driver
interprets special format codes so the printer can print a page
that matches what you created on the screen. Xerox desktop
laser printers have their own printer drivers so you can take
full advantage of the printer’s features.
Printer macro Used by the page description language to send
often-repeated commands and specifications, such as
linefeed and carriage return information. (Printer macros are
transparent to the user.)
Printer name The default name assigned to each Xerox NIC,
for example, XNExxxxxx_1, or another valid printer name the
user chooses and assigns when running SETUP. See Valid
Printer Name.
Printer reset See Reset.
Protocol A set of rules governing the exchange of data
between data processing devices.
PSERVER emulation Software that runs on a file server or a
network interface card and that enables the file server or
printer to function as a print server.
Queue See Print Queue.
GL-10 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio button A type of feature selection device found in the
RUI and SMS Client Software. The radio button is used for
selecting one option among a group of mutually exclusive
options.
RAM Random Access Memory—read and write memory. This
is commonly referred to as just “memory.” RAM is available
on RAM chips and holds information that is used by the
printer. The information may be discarded at the end of a
print job, when you exit an application, or when the printer is
reset, depending on what kind of information it is: incoming
data for printing, downloaded soft fonts or printer macros for
the current PDL.
Reset To restore the printer to all or some of its default
settings.
ROM Read-Only Memory.
RPRINTER emulation Software run on a client PC (connect to
a network-indirect printer) or a Xerox network interface card
that identifies the printer as a remote printer.
RUI Remote User Interface. The RUI is a DS/P component
that runs on a PC and allows the user to select printer settings
from the PC rather than at the printer’s Control Panel.
Scalable fonts Fonts described by formulae that produce a
font outline. The formulae can be used to scale the font up or
down (by point size).
SDF See Standard Data File.
Serial port A type of port in which data is transmitted and
received in bits rather than bytes. Typically used for printing
over longer distances.
Server A special-purpose computer system (typically a PC
using a 80386 or 80486 CPU, or another processor based on
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the Motorola 68000 CPU) that is connected to the local area
network and controls shared peripherals (PCs, printers, etc.).
Service Coordinator The NLM portion of SMS that obtains
job and status information from direct-connect printers and
reports it to users running SMS Client Software. The Service
Coordinator also acquires and stores accounting data
generated by the printer assigned to it during SETUP. (The
relationship between the printer and the Service Coordinator
is stored in the Configuration File.)
SIMM Single Inline Memory Module. A SIMM has several
connected memory chips and connects to a slot on the printer
controller board to increase the available RAM on the printer.
The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers have two SIMM
slots and will accept SIMMs with 4 MB or 16 MB of memory,
running at 70 ns (nanoseconds).
SMS Status & Management Services. A DS/P component that
resides on the client PC and the file server. SMS features
include, but are not limited to, the ability to view the status of
various network printers and jobs in their queue, find the best
printer for the job, and generate accounting reports.
SMS Client Software The Integrated Visual Display (IVD)
portion of SMS the end-user runs on the PC.
Spooling A portion of memory (in this case on the printer)
that will hold documents to be processed by the printer. This
frees up the computer to go on with other work.
Stand-alone Not connected, directly or indirectly, to a
network. A stand-alone printer is connected to a PC through
a serial or parallel cable.
Standard Data File A data file format that can be read by
many software applications. SDF files contain data elements
delimited by any special character, typically the comma. Each
logical record in an SDF file is terminated by a carriage
GL-12 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
return. SMS accounting export data files are stored in SDF
format.
State Saving A PCL Menu option that enables you to save
permanent fonts and macros when jobs switch between PCL
and PostScript.
String See Data String.
Supervisor See NetWare Supervisor.
Temporary fonts These are PCL fonts downloaded with a
particular print job and cleared from memory when the job is
finished.
Toner A dry powdered substance used in the printing
process. The toner supply for the printer is contained in the
recyclable EP (electronic printing) cartridge.
TrueRes Smoothing A PCL capability that smooths curves in
text and graphics to improve print quality.
TrueType fonts A font standard developed by Apple
Computer as an alternative to Adobe Postscript. TrueType
fonts are scalable and can print in both PostScript and PCL
page description languages.
TSR Terminate and Stay Resident. The SMS TSR is a program
that is loaded into the PC’s memory each time the user starts
the PC. The SMS TSR is responsible for routing status
information to the IVD, and displaying alert messages on the
client’s monitor.
Typeface The design of a set of characters and symbols—all
uppercase and lowercase letters, arabic numerals, and
common punctuation and symbols. Typefaces often bear the
name of the person who designed them, like Bodoni and
Garamond.
G l o s s a r y
❖
GL-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal paper tray Called “universal” because it adjusts to
a variety of paper sizes.
User chargeback An SMS accounting term defining the
ability to generate user printing costs typically calculated by
multiplying the number of pages printed by the cost-per-page
value.
Valid printer name A printer name that does not begin with
the letters “DSP” and that terminates with the characters
“_1”.
XNIC-E’NET Xerox Network Interface Card-Ethernet. (See
also NIC.)
XNIC-L’TALK Xerox Network Interface Card-LocalTalk. (See
also NIC.)
XNIC-T’RING Xerox Network Interface Card-Token Ring.
(See also NIC.)
GL-14 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Config. Sheet function
Test Menu 3-62
A
Adjusting print density 6-12
Configuration Sheet 3-14, 3-62,
Auto Continue option
7-7
System Menu 3-59
Context saving, see State
Saving option 3-28
Auto Job End option
also see Port Timeout option
Ethernet Menu 3-53
Parallel Menu 3-43
Serial Menu 3-47
Token Ring Menu 3-56
Control Panel
Display 3-4
Indicator Lights, see Control
Panel indicator lights
Keys, see Control Panel keys
Location 1-3
Menu options 3-12 to 3-66
Messages 7-5 to 7-18
Navigating 3-8 to 3-11
Overview 3-3
B
Baud Rate option
Serial Menu 3-48
Bidirectional option
Parallel Menu 3-44
Control Panel indicator lights
Bitmapped fonts 4-3
3-5
Form Feed 3-5
Online 3-5
Ready 3-5
C
Cable specifications A-7
Cancel PS Job function
Reset Menu 3-66
Chime option
System Menu 3-58
Cleaning
see Printer maintenance
I n d e x
❖
IX-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D
Control Panel keys 3-6 to 3-7
Esc key 3-7
Down 3-7
Enter 3-7
Esc 3-7
Form Feed 3-6
Menu 3-6
Online 3-6
Reset 3-6
Up 3-7
Español option
Language 3-14
Ethernet Menu 3-51 to 3-53
Options 3-51 to 3-53
Auto Job End 3-53
Frame Type 3-53
Lang. Sensing 3-52, 4-9
Port Timeout 3-51
Copies option
PCL Menu 3-19
PostScript Menu 3-32
System Language 3-51
F
D
Flow control, see Handshake option
Data Bits option
Font Number option
Serial Menu 3-49
PCL Menu 3-20
Default Source option
Font Source option
PCL Menu 3-21
PCL Menu 3-19
Default Tray option
Fonts
PostScript Menu 3-32
Adobe PostScript (Type 1) 4-9
Bitmapped 4-3
Definition 4-3
Downloading 1-5, 4-13 to 4-15
Font card 4-4, 4-10
Installing 5-19 to 5-20
Slot location 1-3
Defaults option
System Menu 3-60
Deutsch option
Language 3-14
Documentation D-10
Down key 3-7
Font Family 4-3
Intellifont 4-7
PCL bitmap 4-8
Permanently downloaded 4-14
Printer 4-4
Downloading fonts 4-13 to 4-15
Drilled paper
Loading 2-20
Scalable 4-3
Screen 4-4
TrueType 4-6
DTR Polarity option
Serial Menu 3-48
Form Feed indicator 3-5
Form Feed key 3-6
E
Emulation, see Lang. Sensing option, State
Form Length option
PCL Menu 3-24
Saving option
English option
Language 3-14
Frame Type option
Ethernet Menu 3-53
Enter key 3-7
Français canad. option
Language 3-14
Envelopes
Loading 2-21
Français option
Language 3-14
EP cartridge
Recycling 6-3
Replacing 6-3 to 6-8
Front Cover
Location 1-3
IX-2 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H
Fuser cleaning cycle
Procedure 6-9 to 6-10
Language
Options
Deutsch 3-14
English 3-14
Español 3-14
Fuser Cleaning function
Test Menu 3-64
Français 3-14
Français canad. 3-14
Italiano 3-14
H
Handshake option
Portuguése (BRA) 3-14
Serial Menu 3-48
Letterhead
Loading 2-20
Hex Dump option
System Menu 3-58
LocalTalk Menu 3-50
Option 3-50
I
Port Timeout 3-50
Intellifont Fonts 4-7
Lower base 2-13
Interface
network A-14
parallel A-7
serial A-10, A-12
Lower source
Location 2-4
Lower tray 2-13
Loading paper 2-14 to 2-17
Interface Menu 3-37 to 3-56
Ethernet Menu, see Ethernet Menu
LocalTalk Menu, see LocalTalk Menu
Parallel Menu, see Parallel Menu
Serial Menu, see Serial Menu
Location 2-8
M
Main Menu system 3-12 to 3-66
Interface Menu, see Interface Menu
PCL Menu, see PCL Menu
PostScript Menu, see PostScript Menu
System Menu, see System Menu
Test Menu, see Test Menu
Token Ring Menu, see Token Ring Menu
Italiano option
Language 3-14
J
Jam Recovery option
Maintenance
Effect on memory 3-68
PCL Menu 3-26
PostScript Menu 3-35
see Printer maintenance
Manual Size option
PostScript Menu 3-34
Memory
L
Adding, see SIMM, Installing
Maximum capacity 1-6
Overview 1-6
Labels
Loading 2-20
Lang. Sensing option
Ethernet Menu 3-52
Parallel Menu 3-42
Serial Menu 3-46
Memory Check function
Test Menu 3-64
Menu key 3-6
Modem, null A-14
MP Tray Size option
PCL Menu 3-23
Multipurpose (MP) source
Location 2-4
I n d e x
❖
IX-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
Multipurpose (MP) tray 2-11 to 2-12
Paper loading
Default Source option 3-21
Feeding paper 2-18 to 2-19
Location 1-3, 2-8
Manual Size option 3-34
MP Tray Size option 3-23
Tray Switching option 3-33
Drilled paper 2-20
Envelopes 2-21
Labels 2-20
Letterhead 2-20
Lower tray 2-14 to 2-17
Standard tray 2-14 to 2-17
Paper Size option
PCL Menu 3-23
N
Network interface A-14
Paper sources
Lower
Network ports
Location 2-4
Multipurpose (MP)
Location 2-4
Location 1-3
Null modem A-14
Selecting 2-22 to 2-34
PCL paper sources 2-22
Printing a page 2-23 to 2-24
Source mapping settings 2-26 to 2-27
Standard
O
Online indicator 3-5
Online key 3-6
Options 5-2, D-2
Ordering information D-1
Location 2-4
Paper trays
250-sheet capacity 2-9, 2-13
500-sheet capacity 2-13
Lower 2-13
Orientation option
PCL Menu 3-23
Location 2-8
Multipurpose (MP) 2-11 to 2-12
Location 2-8
Output tray
Capacity 2-5
Location 1-3, 2-5
Output
Location 2-5
Standard 2-9 to 2-10
Location 2-8
P
Page Protection option
Effect on memory 3-67
PCL Menu 3-26
Parallel interface A-7
Parallel Menu 3-41 to 3-44
Paper
Options 3-41 to 3-44
Auto Job End 3-43
Bidirectional 3-44
Lang. Sensing 3-42, 4-9
Port Enable 3-41
Port Timeout 3-41
System Language 3-41
Transfer Rate 3-44
Feeding, see Paper feeding
Input sources 2-4
Input trays 2-8
Jams 2-5, 2-28, 3-6, 3-26, 3-35, 3-68, 7-19
see also Jam Recovery option
Output tray 2-5
Output tray capacity 2-5
Size 2-6
Parallel port
Location 1-3
Weight 2-6
Paper feeding
Multipurpose (MP) tray 2-18 to 2-19
Parity option
Serial Menu 3-49
Paper jams 7-19
PCL Font List function
Test Menu 3-63
IX-4 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R
PCL language, see System Language option
PostScript Menu 3-29 to 3-36
Options 3-32 to 3-36
Copies 3-32
PCL Menu 3-15 to 3-28
Options 3-18 to 3-28
Copies 3-19
Default Tray 3-32
Jam Recovery 3-35
Manual Size 3-34
Print Errors 3-34
Resolution 3-35
State Saving 3-36
Tray Switching 3-33
TrueRes 3-35
Default Source 3-21
Font Number 3-20
Font Source 3-19
Form Length 3-24
Jam Recovery 3-26
MP Tray Size 3-23
Orientation 3-23
Page Protection 3-26
Paper Size 3-23
Power outlet
Location 1-3
Pitch 3-20
Power Saver option
System Menu 3-60
Point Size 3-21
Resolution 3-27
Power Switch
Location 1-3
Source Mapping 3-22
State Saving 3-28
Symbol Set 3-25
TrueRes 3-27
Pre-printed stationery, see Letterhead
Print density
adjusting 6-12
Pitch option
PCL Menu 3-20
Print Density option
System Menu 3-59
Point Size option
PCL Menu 3-21
Print Errors option
PostScript Menu 3-34
Port Enable option
Parallel Menu 3-41
Serial Menu 3-45
Print quality problems 7-29
Port Timeout option
Printer maintenance
also see Auto Job End option
Ethernet Menu 3-51
LocalTalk Menu 3-50
Parallel Menu 3-41
Cleaning the printer 6-13
EP cartridge replacement 6-3 to 6-8
Fuser cleaning 6-9 to 6-10
Moving the printer 6-14
Serial Menu 3-45
Printer operational problems 7-26
Port Type option
Serial Menu 3-47
PS Font List function
Test Menu 3-63
Ports
Network
Location 1-3
R
Ready indicator 3-5
Remote User Interface 1-4
Parallel
Location 1-3
Serial
Reset All function
Reset Menu 3-66
Location 1-3
Portuguése (BRA) option
Language 3-14
Reset I/f Cards function
Reset Menu 3-66
PostScript fonts 4-9
Reset key 3-6
PostScript language, see System Language option
I n d e x
❖
IX-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S
Reset Menu 3-65 to 3-66
Specifications, cable A-7
Functions 3-65 to 3-66
Cancel PS Job 3-66
Reset All 3-66
Reset I/f Cards 3-66
Reset Menus 3-66
Reset Printer 3-66
Standard source
Location 2-4
Standard tray 2-9 to 2-10
Loading paper 2-14 to 2-17
Location 2-8
Reset Menus function
Reset Menu 3-66
State Saving option
Effect on memory 3-68
PCL Menu 3-28
Reset Printer function
Reset Menu 3-66
PostScript Menu 3-36
Stop Bits option
Serial Menu 3-49
Resolution option
Effect on memory 3-68
PCL Menu 3-27
Symbol Set option
PostScript Menu 3-35
PCL Menu 3-25
RUI 1-4
System Language option
Ethernet Menu 3-51
Parallel Menu 3-41
Serial Menu 3-45
S
Scalable fonts 4-3
Token Ring Menu 3-55
Serial interface
RS-232C A-10
RS-422A A-12
System Menu 3-57 to 3-60
Options 3-58 to 3-60
Auto Continue 3-59
Chime 3-58
Serial Menu 3-45 to 3-49
Defaults 3-60
Options 3-45 to 3-49
Auto Job End 3-47
Baud Rate 3-48
Hex Dump 3-58
Power Saver 3-60
Print Density 3-59
System Messages 3-58
Data Bits 3-49
DTR Polarity 3-48
Handshake 3-48
Lang. Sensing 3-46, 4-9
Parity 3-49
System Messages option
System Menu 3-58
Port Enable 3-45
Port Timeout 3-45
Port Type 3-47
Stop Bits 3-49
System Language 3-45
T
Test Menu 3-61 to 3-64
Functions 3-62 to 3-64
Config. Sheet 3-62
Fuser Cleaning 3-64
Memory Check 3-64
PCL Font List 3-63
PS Font List 3-63
Serial number
Locating 7-4
Serial port
Location 1-3
Test Print 3-63
SIMM
Test Print function
Capacity 5-2
Definition 5-2
Installing 5-4 to 5-18
Test Menu 3-63
Timeout, see Port Timeout option
Source Mapping option
PCL Menu 3-22
IX-6 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
Token Ring Menu 3-54 to 3-56
Options 3-54 to 3-56
Auto Job End 3-56
Lang. Sensing 4-9
System Language 3-55
Toner, see EP cartridge
Transfer Rate option
Parallel Menu 3-44
Tray Switching option
PostScript Menu 3-33
Troubleshooting 7-1 to 7-36
Before calling service 7-2
Control Panel messages 7-5
Locating serial number 7-4
Operational problems 7-26
Paper jams 7-19
Print quality problems 7-29
TrueRes option
PCL Menu 3-27
PostScript Menu 3-35
TrueType fonts 4-6
Type 1 fonts, see PostScript fonts
U
Up key 3-7
I n d e x
❖
IX-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IX-8 ❖
4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|